Sony DCR User Manual

3-079-467-13 (1)  
Digital  
Video Camera Recorder  
Video Camera Recorder  
Operating Instructions  
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,  
and retain it for future reference.  
Owners Record  
The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the  
serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers  
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
-TRV  
Model No. AC-  
Serial No.  
TM  
SERIES  
DCR-TRV350  
DCR-TRV150/TRV250/TRV350/TRV351  
CCD-TRV118/TRV318/TRV418  
©2003 Sony Corporation  
We lco m e !  
Congratulations on your purchase of this Sony Handycam. With your Handycam, you can  
capture lifes precious moments with superior picture and sound quality. Your Handycam is  
loaded with advanced features, but at the same time it is very easy to use. You will soon be  
producing home video that you can enjoy for years to come.  
If you have any questions about this product,  
you may call:  
Sony Customer Information Center 1-800-222-  
WARNING  
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do  
not expose the unit to rain or  
moisture.  
SONY (7669)  
The number below is for the FCC related  
matters only.  
Regulatory Information  
Fo r t h e cu st o m e rs in t h e U.S.A.  
De cla ra t io n o f Co n fo rm it y  
Trade Name:  
Model No.:  
SONY  
DCR-TRV150,  
DCR-TRV250  
Responsible Party: Sony Electronics Inc.  
Address:  
680 Kinderkamack  
Road, Oradell,  
NJ07649 U.S.A.  
201-930-6972  
Telephone No.:  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device  
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
This symbol is intended to  
alert the user to the presence  
of uninsulated “dangerous  
voltage” within the products  
enclosure that may be of  
sufficient magnitude to  
constitute a risk of electric  
shock to persons.  
De cla ra t io n o f Co n fo rm it y  
Trade Name:  
Model No.:  
SONY  
DCR-TRV350  
Responsible Party: Sony Electronics Inc.  
Address:  
680 Kinderkamack  
Road, Oradell,  
NJ07649 U.S.A.  
201-930-6972  
Telephone No.:  
This symbol is intended to  
alert the user to the presence  
of important operating and  
maintenance (servicing)  
instructions in the literature  
accompanying the appliance.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device  
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)  
this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
CAUTION  
You are cautioned that any changes or  
modifications not expressly approved in this  
manual could void your authority to operate  
this equipment.  
2
Note:  
Fo r t h e cu st o m e rs in t h e  
U.S.A. a n d CANADA  
This equipment has been tested and found to  
comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
CAUTION  
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH  
WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,  
FULLY INSERT.  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined  
by turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES  
Lithium-Ion batteries are  
recyclable.  
You can help preserve our  
environment by returning  
your used rechargeable  
batteries to the collection and  
recycling location nearest you.  
For more information regarding recycling of  
rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-  
8837, or visit http:/ / www.rbrc.org/ .  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking  
Lithium-Ion batteries.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/ TV technician for help.  
The supplied interface cable must be used with  
the equipment in order to comply with the  
limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart  
B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.  
3
Ma in Fe a t u re s  
On t h e m o d e l n a m e in d ica t io n  
In this manual, camcorder-shape icons are used to indicate model names.  
CCD-TRV118 :  
CCD-TRV318 :  
CCD-TRV418 :  
DCR-TRV150 :  
DCR-TRV250 :  
DCR-TRV350 :  
DCR-TRV351 :  
Instructions with no icons are for all models.  
Instructions with icons are for the indicated models only.  
Before you start reading this manual, check the model name of your camcorder.  
On t h e t a p e  
Re co rd in g m o vin g o r st ill  
im a g e s, a n d p la yin g t h e m  
b a ck  
• Recording moving pictures (p. 30)  
• Recording still images  
(p. 56)  
• Playing back a tape (p. 45)  
On t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
b
• Recording still images (p. 132)  
• Recording moving pictures (p. 146)  
• Viewing still images (p. 163)  
• Viewing moving pictures (p. 166)  
• Viewing pictures recorded on a tape or live  
from your camcorder on your computer  
– USB Streaming (p. 183)  
• Capturing images on your computer from  
your camcorder using the USB cable (p. 197)  
• Viewing images recorded on a “Memory  
Stick” using the USB cable  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s o n yo u r  
co m p u t e r  
(p. 185)  
• Converting an analog signal into digital to  
capture images onto your computer  
(p. 208)  
4
Ma in Fe a t u re s  
Ot h e r u se s  
Functions for adjusting exposure in the recording mode  
• BACK LIGHT (p. 38)  
NightShot (p. 39)  
• Super NightShot/ Color Slow Shutter  
• PROGRAM AE (p. 68)  
(p. 39, 40)  
• Adjusting the exposure manually (p. 70)  
• Built-in light (p. 79)  
Functions for giving images more impact  
• Digital zoom (p. 34) The default setting is OFF. (To zoom greater than 20×,  
select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu settings.)  
• Fader (p. 61)  
• Picture effect (In recording mode) (p. 64)  
• Digital effect (In recording mode)  
• Title (p. 75, 77)  
(p. 65)  
• MEMORY MIX  
(p. 140)  
Functions for giving a natural appearance to your recordings  
• SPORTS (p. 68)  
• LANDSCAPE (p. 68)  
• Manual focus (p. 71)  
Functions for use on recorded tapes  
• END SEARCH (p. 43)  
• EDITSEARCH/ Rec Review  
• DATA CODE  
• Tape PB ZOOM  
• ZERO SET MEMORY  
• Easy Dubbing  
(p. 43)  
(p. 89)  
(p. 47)  
(p. 87)  
(p. 98)  
• Digital program editing  
(p. 106)  
Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not  
made due to a malfunction of the camcorder, storage media, etc.  
5
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s  
Main Features .......................................... 4  
Checking supplied accessories .............. 9  
Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g  
Op e ra t io n s  
Recording still images on a “Memory  
Stick” while recording on a tape  
...................................... 53  
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e  
– Recording on a tape ........................... 10  
– Recording on a “Memory Stick”  
...................................... 12  
Recording still images on a tape  
– Tape Photo recording  
...................................... 56  
Using the wide mode ........................... 58  
Using the fader function ...................... 61  
Ge t t in g St a rt e d  
Using this manual ................................. 14  
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ... 18  
Installing the battery pack ............. 18  
Charging the battery pack ............. 19  
Connecting to a wall outlet ........... 24  
Step 2 Setting the date and time ........ 26  
Step 3 Inserting a cassette ................... 28  
Using special effects  
– Picture effect ................................. 64  
Using special effects  
– Digital effect  
........... 65  
Using the PROGRAM AE function .... 68  
Adjusting the exposure manually ...... 70  
Focusing manually ................................ 71  
Interval recording  
................ 72  
Re co rd in g Ba sics  
Frame by frame recording  
– Frame recording  
................ 74  
Recording a picture ............................... 30  
Shooting a backlit subject  
– BACK LIGHT ........................ 38  
Superimposing a title ........................... 75  
Making your own titles ........................ 77  
Using the built-in light ......................... 79  
Shooting in the dark  
NightShot  
– Super NightShot  
– Color Slow Shutter  
............................ 39  
Inserting a scene  
.............. 82  
Self-timer recording  
............................... 41  
Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck  
Op e ra t io n s  
Superimposing the date and time  
on pictures  
Playing back a tape with picture  
effects  
.... 83  
.................... 42  
Playing back a tape with digital  
Checking recordings  
– END SEARCH  
– EDITSEARCH  
effects  
.......................... 85  
Enlarging recorded images  
– Tape PB ZOOM  
...... 87  
– Rec Review  
............. 43  
Quickly locating a scene  
– ZERO SET MEMORY  
Pla yb a ck Ba sics  
........................... 89  
Playing back a tape ............................... 45  
Searching for a recording by date  
To display the screen indicators  
– Display function ................... 47  
– DATE SEARCH  
........................... 90  
Viewing recordings on TV................... 51  
Searching for a photo  
– PHOTO SEARCH/  
PHOTO SCAN  
..................... 92  
6
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s  
Ed it in g  
– Pla yb a ck  
Dubbing a tape ...................................... 94  
Viewing still images  
– Memory Photo playback .......... 163  
Dubbing a tape easily – Easy Dubbing  
........................... 98  
Viewing moving pictures  
– MPEG movie playback ............. 166  
Dubbing only desired scenes  
– Digital program editing (on tapes)  
.............. 106  
Selecting a folder to view ................... 169  
Copying images recorded on a  
Recording video or TV programs  
.............. 119  
“Memory Stick” to a tape ............ 170  
Enlarging still images recorded on a  
“Memory Stick”  
Inserting a scene from a VCR  
– Insert Editing  
– Memory PB ZOOM ................... 172  
......................... 123  
Playing back images continuously  
– SLIDE SHOW ............................. 174  
Preventing accidental erasure  
Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s  
– Re co rd in g  
– Image protection ........................ 176  
Deleting images – DELETE ............... 177  
Writing a print mark  
Using a “Memory Stick”  
– PRINT MARK ............................ 180  
– Introduction ............................... 126  
Recording still images on a “Memory  
Stick”  
Vie w in g Im a g e s o n Yo u r  
Co m p u t e r  
– Memory Photo recording ......... 132  
Recording images from a tape as still  
images ............................................ 136  
Viewing images on your computer  
– Introduction  
Superimposing a still image in the  
“Memory Stick” on an image  
.............. 182  
Connecting your camcorder to your  
computer using the USB cable  
......... 187  
– MEMORY MIX .......................... 140  
Recording moving pictures on a  
“Memory Stick”  
Viewing pictures recorded on a tape  
or live from your camcorder on  
your computer – USB Streaming  
......... 197  
– MPEG movie recording ............ 146  
Recording pictures from a tape as a  
moving picture ............................. 150  
Interval Photo recording .................... 154  
Viewing images recorded on a  
“Memory Stick” on your computer  
.................... 202  
Recording edited pictures as a moving  
picture – Digital program editing  
(on a “Memory Stick”) ................. 156  
Connecting your camcorder to your  
computer using the USB cable  
................... 205  
Setting up a folder ............................... 160  
Viewing images recorded on a  
“Memory Stick” on your computer  
................... 207  
Capturing images from an analog video  
unit on your computer – Signal  
convert function  
...... 208  
7
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s  
,
and are trademarks.  
Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r  
• i.LINK and are trademarks.  
• “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony  
Corporation.  
Changing the menu settings .............. 210  
• “Memory Stick,”  
Memory Stick” are trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
and “MagicGate  
Tro u b le sh o o t in g  
Types of trouble and how to correct  
trouble ............................................ 224  
• “Memory Stick Duo” and  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
• Windows and Windows Media are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/ or other countries.  
Self-diagnosis display ......................... 232  
Warning indicators and messages .... 233  
Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n  
• Pentium is trademark or registered  
trademark of Intel Corporation.  
About video cassette ........................... 237  
About the “Memory Stick” ................ 240  
• Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are  
trademarks of Apple Computer Inc.  
• All other product names mentioned herein  
may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies.  
Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not  
mentioned in each case in this manual.  
About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery  
pack ................................................ 242  
About i.LINK ....................................... 244  
Using your camcorder abroad .......... 246  
Maintenance information and  
precautions .................................... 247  
Specifications ....................................... 253  
Qu ick Re fe re n ce  
Identifying parts and controls ........... 256  
Index ..................................................... 267  
8
Ch e ckin g su p p lie d a cce sso rie s  
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.  
1
3
7
2
5
9
or  
RMT-814  
RMT-708  
4
8
6
Stereo  
or  
Monaural  
q;  
1 Wireless Remote Commander (1)  
5 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 51, 94, 95)  
Stereo:  
(p. 264)  
RMT-814:  
RMT-708:  
Monaural:  
6 Shoulder strap (1) (p. 256)  
7 Lens cap (1) (p. 30)  
2 AC-L15A/L15B AC Adaptor (1), Pow er  
cord (1) (p. 19)  
8 USB cable (1)  
(p. 182)  
3 NP-FM30 Rechargeable Battery Pack  
(1) (p. 18, 19)  
9 CD-ROM (SPVD-010 USB Driver) (1)  
(p. 189)  
4 Size AA (R6) battery for Remote  
Commander (2)  
0 “Memory Stick” (1)  
(p. 240)  
(p. 264)  
9
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e Re co rd in g o n a t a p e  
This chapter introduces you to the basic features to record on a  
tape of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses “( )” for  
more information.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 24)  
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 18).  
Open the DC IN  
jack cover.  
Connect the plug with  
its v mark facing up.  
Power cord  
AC Adaptor (supplied)  
In se rt in g a ca sse t t e (p . 28)  
1Slide  
OPEN/  
EJECT in the direction  
of the arrow and open  
the lid.  
2Push the center of the  
3Close the cassette  
cassette back and  
insert the cassette  
properly with the  
cassette window  
facing up.  
compartment by  
pressing  
on the  
cassette compartment.  
After the cassette  
compartment goes  
down completely,  
close the lid.  
10  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re (p . 30)  
2Set the POWER switch  
to CAMERA while  
pressing the small  
green button.  
1Remove the lens cap.  
The cap is not attached when you  
purchase your camcorder.  
3Open the LCD  
panel while  
pressing OPEN.  
The picture appears  
on the LCD screen.  
4Press START/ STOP. Your  
camcorder starts  
recording. To stop  
recording, press START/  
STOP again.  
View finder  
View a picture placing your eye against this part  
when the LCD panel is closed (p. 32).  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight (p. 35).  
The picture in the viewfinder is black and white.  
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock is not set up yet. If you want to record the date and  
time for a picture, set the clock before recording (p. 26).  
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck p ict u re o n t h e LCD  
scre e n (p . 45)  
2Press m to rewind the tape.  
REW  
3Press N to start playback.  
PLAY  
1Set the POWER switch to VCR/ PLAYER  
R
while pressing the small green button.*  
Note  
Do not pick up your camcorder by  
the viewfinder, the LCD panel, or the  
battery pack.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
11  
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e Re co rd in g o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
This chapter introduces you to the basic features to record on a  
“Memory Stick” of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses  
“( )” for more information.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 24)  
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 18).  
Open the DC IN  
jack cover.  
Connect the plug with its v  
mark facing up.  
Power cord  
AC Adaptor (supplied)  
In se rt in g a Me m o ry St ick(p . 127)  
Insert a “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the b mark  
facing the LCD panel as illustrated.  
“Memory Stick” slot  
b mark  
When ejecting the “Memory  
Stick,” press the “Memory Stick”  
once lightly.  
12  
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e o n a Me m o ry St ick(p . 132)  
2Set the POWER switch to  
MEMORY while pressing the  
small green button. Make sure  
that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
1Remove the lens cap.  
The cap is not attached when you  
purchase your camcorder.  
3Open the  
LCD panel  
while  
LOCK switch  
R
pressing  
OPEN. The  
picture  
appears on  
the screen.  
4Press PHOTO  
lightly.  
5Press PHOTO  
View finder  
deeper.  
View a picture placing your eye against this  
part when the LCD panel is closed (p. 32).  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight  
(p. 35).  
The picture in the viewfinder is black and  
white.  
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock is not set up yet. If you want to record the date and  
time for a picture, set the clock before recording (p. 26).  
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck st ill im a g e s o n t h e LCD  
scre e n (p . 163)  
1Set the POWER switch to  
MEMORY or VCR while  
pressing the small green  
button.  
2Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is  
displayed.  
PLAY  
Press MEMORY +/ – to select the desired image.  
Note  
Do not pick up your camcorder by  
the viewfinder, the LCD panel or  
the battery pack.  
13  
Ge t t in g St a rt e d —  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
The instructions in this manual are for the seven models listed in the table below.  
Before you start reading this manual and operating your camcorder, check the model  
number by looking at the bottom of your camcorder. The DCR-TRV350 is the model  
used for illustration purposes. Otherwise, the model name is indicated in the  
illustrations. Any differences in operation are clearly indicated in the text, for example,  
.”  
As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in  
capital letters.  
e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep to indicate that the operation is  
being carried out.  
Types of differences  
Model  
Recording system  
Playback system  
AUDIO/ VIDEO jack  
S VIDEO jack  
DV jack  
Hi8  
Hi8/ 8  
OUT  
OUT  
Hi8  
Hi8/ 8  
OUT  
OUT  
Hi8  
Hi8/ 8  
OUT  
OUT  
Digital8 Digital8  
Digital8  
Digital8 Digital8 Digital8/ Hi8/ 8  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
IN/ OUT  
IN/ OUT  
IN/ OUT IN/ OUT  
IN/ OUT  
USB jack  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Memory Stickslot  
LANC jack  
SteadyShot  
z
z
Remote sensor  
RFU jack  
z
z
z
z
MIC jack  
z Provided  
Not provided  
14  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
Be fo re u sin g yo u r ca m co rd e r  
With your camcorder, you can use the tapes and record/ playback on the systems  
below. To enable smooth transition, we recommend that you do not mix pictures  
recorded in the Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm with the Digital8 system on a tape.  
1)  
Usable cassette tapes  
Recording system  
Hi8  
/ Digital8 (recommended) Standard 8 mm  
*
Digital8  
Digital8  
2)  
Playback system *  
Hi8  
Standard 8 mm  
1)  
Usable cassette tapes  
Recording system  
Playback system  
Hi8  
/ Digital8 (recommended) Standard 8 mm  
*
Digital8  
Digital8  
Usable cassette tapes  
Recording system  
Hi8  
Hi8  
Hi8  
Standard 8 mm  
Standard 8 mm  
Standard 8 mm  
3)  
*
2)  
Playback system *  
1)  
* If you use standard 8 mm tape, be sure to play back the tape on your camcorder.  
Mosaic noise may appear when you play back standard 8 mm tape on other VCRs  
(including another DCR-TRV150/ TRV250/ TRV350/ TRV351).  
2)  
* When you play back a tape, the Hi8  
system or standard 8 mm system is  
automatically detected and the playback system automatically switches to.  
3)  
* If you record on a Hi8  
video cassette in the LP mode, recording is carried out in  
the standard 8 mm system.  
No t e o n TV co lo r syst e m s  
TV color systems differ from country to country. To view your recordings on a TV, you  
need an NTSC system-based TV.  
Co p yrig h t p re ca u t io n s  
Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted.  
Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the  
copyright laws.  
15  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
No t e o n co n n e ct in g o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
When you connect your camcorder to other video equipment or a computer using the  
USB cable or i.LINK cable, observe the shape of the jack.  
If you forcibly insert the plug, the jack may be damaged and they may result in a  
malfunction of your camcorder.  
On t h e m o d e l n a m e in d ica t io n  
In this manual, camcorder-shape icons are used to indicate model names.  
CCD-TRV118 :  
CCD-TRV318 :  
CCD-TRV418 :  
DCR-TRV150 :  
DCR-TRV250 :  
DCR-TRV350 :  
DCR-TRV351 :  
Instructions with no icons are for all models.  
Instructions with icons are for the indicated models only.  
Before you start reading this manual, check the model name of your camcorder.  
On t h e POWER sw it ch  
Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models.  
Consider this when following the operating instructions.  
VCR  
:
:
e.g. Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
or  
PLAYER  
e.g. Set the POWER switch to PLAYER.  
R
POWER  
OFF (CHG) : Common to all models  
e.g. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
A
CAMERA : Common to all models  
e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
MEMORY :  
e.g. Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
16  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
Pre ca u t io n s o n ca m co rd e r ca re  
Le n s a n d LCD scre e n /fin d e r  
The LCD screen and the finder are manufactured using extremely high-precision  
technology so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use.  
How ever, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (w hite, red,  
blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder.  
These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the  
recording in any w ay.  
Do not let your camcorder become wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea  
water. Letting your camcorder become wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a ].  
Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a  
car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b ].  
Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD  
screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause  
malfunctions [c].  
Do not directly shoot the sun. Doing so might cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
Take pictures of the sun in low light conditions such as dusk [d ].  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
17  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
In st a llin g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.  
(2) Slide the battery pack down until it clicks.  
1
2
To re m o ve t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.  
(2) Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing the  
BATT (battery) release lever down.  
BATT (battery)  
release lever  
If you install the large-capacity battery pack  
If you install the NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91/ QM91D battery pack  
on your camcorder, extend the viewfinder.  
18  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Use the battery pack after charging it for your camcorder.  
Your camcorder operates only with the InfoLITHIUMbattery pack (M series).  
See page 242 for details of InfoLITHIUMbattery pack.  
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC Adaptor supplied with your  
camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plugs v mark facing up.  
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC Adaptor.  
(3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.  
(4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
The charge lamp lights up when charging begins.  
4
BATT INFO  
1
2
19  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
To check the state of the battery (BATTERY INFO)  
Open the LCD panel while pressing OPEN, then press BATT INFO.  
The BATTERY INFO is displayed for about seven seconds.  
The battery charge level is displayed as percentage and recordable  
BATTERY INFO  
time with the LCD screen/ viewfinder.  
The battery charge level is displayed in 10% increments.  
BATTERY CHARGE LEVEL  
0%  
50%  
100%  
REC TIME AVAILABLE  
LCD SCREEN: 56 min  
VIEWFINDER: 73 min  
Charging  
j
When the battery is fully charged, the battery charge level  
indicator shows 100% and the charge lamp goes out.  
BATTERY INFO  
BATTERY CHARGE LEVEL  
0%  
50%  
100%  
REC TIME AVAILABLE  
LCD SCREEN: 80 min  
VIEWFINDER: 105 min  
Full charge  
Aft e r ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Disconnect the AC Adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.  
Until the remaining battery charge is calculated  
The battery charge level indicator moves flashing and  
BATTERY INFO  
CALCULATING BATTERY INFO...is displayed.  
BATTERY CHARGE LEVEL  
0%  
50%  
100%  
CALCULATING  
BATTERY INFO...  
Note  
Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts on the DC plug  
of the AC Adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC Adaptor.  
When you use the AC Adaptor  
Place the AC Adaptor near a wall outlet. If any trouble occurs with this unit, disconnect  
the plug from the wall outlet as soon as possible to cut off the power.  
The numeric value displayed in the BATTERY INFO  
Refer to the value displayed in the BATTERY INFO as a rough standard.  
To display the BATTERY INFO longer  
Press BATT INFO again while the BATTERY INFO is still displayed. The information is  
displayed for another seven seconds.  
If you keep pressing BATT INFO, the BATTERY INFO is displayed for up to about 20  
seconds.  
The BATTERY INFO is not displayed in the follow ing cases:  
The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).  
The battery pack is not installed properly.  
The battery pack is fully discharged.  
20  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
If the pow er goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that  
the battery pack has enough pow er to operate  
Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication is correct.  
What is InfoLITHIUM?  
The InfoLITHIUMis a lithium ion battery pack that can exchange data such as  
battery consumption with compatible electronic equipment. This unit is compatible  
with the InfoLITHIUMbattery pack (M series). Your camcorder operates only with  
the InfoLITHIUMbattery. InfoLITHIUMM series battery packs have the  
mark (p. 242).  
TM  
SERIES  
Ch a rg in g t im e  
Battery pack  
Full charge  
145  
NP-FM30 (supplied)  
NP-FM50  
150  
NP-FM70  
240  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM90  
260  
330  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
360  
Approximate minutes to charge an empty battery pack at 25°C (77°F).  
The charging time may increase if the batterys temperature is extremely high or low  
because of the ambient temperature.  
21  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Re co rd in g t im e  
Recording w ith  
the view finder  
Recording w ith  
the LCD screen  
Battery pack  
Continuous  
Typical*  
50  
Continuous  
Typical*  
40  
NP-FM30 (supplied)  
NP-FM50  
105  
170  
355  
415  
540  
625  
80  
85  
130  
270  
315  
410  
475  
70  
NP-FM70  
175  
145  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM90  
205  
165  
270  
215  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
310  
250  
Recording w ith  
the view finder  
Recording w ith  
the LCD screen  
Battery pack  
Continuous  
Typical*  
55  
Continuous  
Typical*  
40  
NP-FM30 (supplied)  
NP-FM50  
115  
185  
385  
445  
580  
670  
85  
90  
140  
295  
340  
450  
520  
70  
NP-FM70  
190  
145  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM90  
220  
165  
285  
220  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
330  
255  
Recording w ith  
the view finder  
Recording w ith  
the LCD screen  
Battery pack  
Continuous  
Typical*  
80  
Continuous  
Typical*  
60  
NP-FM30 (supplied)  
NP-FM50  
165  
265  
540  
640  
820  
955  
120  
195  
400  
465  
600  
695  
130  
100  
NP-FM70  
265  
205  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM90  
315  
235  
400  
305  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
465  
355  
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery  
* Approximate recording time.  
The actual battery life may be shorter in the following cases:  
– When you repeat recording start/ stop, zooming and turning the power on/ off.  
– When the battery is used repeatedly or self-discharged after charging (p. 242).  
22  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Pla yin g t im e  
Playing on  
Battery pack  
Playing w ith  
the LCD closed  
the LCD screen  
NP-FM30 (supplied)  
NP-FM50  
80  
120  
195  
400  
465  
600  
695  
135  
285  
335  
435  
505  
NP-FM70  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM90  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
Playing on  
the LCD screen  
Playing w ith  
the LCD closed  
Battery pack  
NP-FM30 (supplied)  
NP-FM50  
90  
130  
210  
430  
505  
655  
755  
150  
310  
365  
475  
550  
NP-FM70  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM90  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
Playing on  
the LCD screen  
Playing w ith  
the LCD closed  
Battery pack  
NP-FM30 (supplied)  
NP-FM50  
120  
195  
400  
465  
600  
695  
175  
280  
570  
675  
865  
1010  
NP-FM70  
NP-QM71/ QM71D  
NP-FM90  
NP-FM91/ QM91/ QM91D  
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery  
23  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Note  
Approximate continuous playing time at 25°C (77°F). The battery life will be shorter if  
you use your camcorder in a cold environment.  
Playback time  
The table shows the playing time for tapes recorded in the Digital8 system.  
The playing time of tapes recorded in the Hi8  
by about 20%.  
/ standard 8 mm system is reduced  
You can charge the battery in other countries  
For details, see page 246.  
Recommended charging temperature  
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C  
to 30°C (50°F to 86°F).  
Co n n e ct in g t o a w a ll o u t le t  
When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from a  
wall outlet using the AC Adaptor.  
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover, and connect the AC Adaptor to the DC IN jack on  
your camcorder with the plugs v mark facing up.  
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC Adaptor.  
(3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.  
2, 3  
1
24  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
PRECAUTION  
The set is not disconnected from the AC power source (house current) as long as it is  
connected to the wall outlet, even if the set itself has been turned off.  
Notes  
The AC Adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your  
camcorder.  
The DC IN jack has source priority.This means that the battery pack cannot supply  
any power if the power cord is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the power  
cord is not plugged into a wall outlet.  
Place the AC Adaptor near a wall outlet.  
While using the AC Adaptor, if any trouble occurs with this unit, disconnect the plug  
from the wall outlet as soon as possible to cut off the power.  
Using a car battery  
Use Sony Car Battery Adaptor (optional). Refer to the operating instructions of the Car  
Battery Adaptor for further information.  
25  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
Set the date and time when you use your camcorder for the first time.  
CLOCK SETwill be displayed each time when you set the POWER switch to  
CAMERA or MEMORY unless you set the date and time settings.*  
If you do not use your camcorder for about three months, the date and time settings  
may be cleared from memory (bars may appear) because the built-in rechargeable  
battery will have been discharged (p. 249).  
Set the date and time after charging the built-in battery fully.  
Set the year, then the month, the day, the hour and then the minute.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY, and then press MENU to  
display the menu settings.*  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET in  
, then press the  
dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired year, then press the dial.  
(4) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and  
pressing the dial.  
(5) Set the minute by turning the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by  
the time signal. The clock starts.  
(6) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
1,6  
MENU  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LTR SIZE  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
RETURN  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LTR SIZE  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
RETURN  
:
:
– – – – – –  
2
3
5
2003 JAN  
1
12 00 AM  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
2003 JAN  
1
2003 JAN  
1
12 00 AM  
12 00 AM  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LTR SIZE  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
RETURN  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET JUL  
USB STREAM 5 30 00 PM  
LTR SIZE  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
RETURN  
4
2003  
:
:
2003 JUL  
4
5
30 PM  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
26  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
The year changes as follow s:  
2000  
2003  
2079  
To ch e ck t h e p re se t d a t e a n d t im e  
Press DATE to display the date indicator.  
Press TIME to display the time indicator.  
Press DATE (or TIME) and then press TIME (or DATE) to simultaneously display the  
date and time indicator.  
Press DATE and/ or TIME again. The date and/ or time indicator disappears.  
Auto date function  
When you use your camcorder for the first time, turn it on and set the date and time to  
your local time before you start recording (p. 26). The date is automatically recorded for  
10 seconds after you start recording (Auto date function). This function works only  
once a day.  
If you do not set the date and time  
--- -- ----” “--:--:--is recorded on the tape  
or the Memory Stick”  
.
Note on the time indicator  
The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 12-hour cycle.  
12:00 AM stands for midnight.  
12:00 PM stands for noon.  
Note on the auto date function  
You can change the AUTO DATE setting by selecting ON or OFF in the menu settings.  
The auto date function automatically displays the date once a day.  
However, the date may automatically appear more than once a day if:  
you set the date and time.  
you eject and insert the tape again.  
you stop recording within 10 seconds.  
you set AUTO DATE to OFF once and set it back to ON in the menu settings.  
27  
St e p 3 In se rt in g a ca sse t t e  
See page 15 for details about the usable cassettes types.  
(1) Prepare the power source (p. 18).  
(2) Slide  
OPEN/ EJECT in the direction of the arrow and open the lid.  
The cassette compartment automatically lifts up and opens.  
(3) Push the center of the cassette back and insert the cassette properly with the  
cassette window facing up.  
(4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing  
on the cassette compartment.  
The cassette compartment automatically goes down.  
(5) After the cassette compartment goes down completely, close the lid until it  
clicks.  
2
3,4  
5
To e je ct t h e ca sse t t e  
Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step (3).  
28  
St e p 3 In se rt in g a ca sse t t e  
Notes  
Do not press the cassette compartment down. Doing so may cause a malfunction.  
The cassette compartment may not be closed when you press any part of the cassette  
compartment other than the mark.  
Your camcorder records pictures in the Digital8 system.  
The recording time when you use your camcorder is half of the indicated time on Hi8  
tape. If you select the LP mode in the menu settings, the recording time is 3/ 4 of  
the indicated time on Hi8  
tape.  
If you use standard 8 mm tape, be sure to play back the tape on your camcorder.  
Mosaic noise may appear when you play back standard 8 mm tape on other  
camcorders (including another DCR-TRV150/ TRV250/ TRV350/ TRV351).  
To prevent accidental erasure  
Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to expose the red mark.  
29  
Re co rd in g Ba sics —  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Your camcorder automatically focuses.  
(1) Remove the lens cap and attach the lens cap to the grip strap.  
(2) Install the power source and insert a cassette. See Step 1to Step 3for more  
information (p. 18 to 29).  
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button.  
This sets your camcorder to the standby mode.  
(4) Open the LCD panel while pressing OPEN. The viewfinder automatically  
turns off.  
(5) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The REC indicator  
appears on the screen. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your  
camcorder lights up. To stop recording, press START/ STOP again.  
The recording lamp lights up in the viewfinder when you record with the  
viewfinder.  
1
3
5
SP  
REC 0:00:01  
50min  
4
2
Camera  
recording lamp  
Microphone  
Notes  
The data code (date/ time when recorded) are not displayed during recording.  
However, they are recorded automatically onto the tape. To display the data code  
(date/ time), press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during playback.  
Fasten the grip strap firmly.  
Do not touch the built-in microphone during recording.  
30  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Note on the LOCK sw itch  
When you slide the LOCK switch to the right, the POWER switch can no longer be set  
to MEMORY accidentally. The LOCK switch is set to the left as the default setting.  
Note on recording mode  
Your camcorder records and plays back in the SP (standard play) mode or in the LP  
(long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings (p. 219). In the LP mode, you can  
1)  
record longer than in SP mode.* When you record a tape in the LP mode on your  
camcorder, we recommend that you play back the tape on your camcorder.  
To enable smooth transition  
Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as  
you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder.  
However, check the following:  
Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and in the LP mode on one tape.  
When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
2)  
If you leave your camcorder in the standby mode for a certain period * w hile the  
cassette is inserted  
Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to save battery power and to prevent  
battery and tape wear. To resume the standby mode, set the POWER switch to OFF  
(CHG) once, then turn it to CAMERA again. However, your camcorder does not turn  
off automatically while the cassette is not inserted.  
To set the counter to 0:00:00  
Press COUNTER RESET (p. 259).  
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes  
in the LP mode  
The time code may not be written properly between scenes.  
The transition between scenes may not be smooth.  
The playback picture may be distorted.  
1)  
* 1.5 times:  
Twice:  
* three minutes:  
2)  
five minutes:  
31  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Aft e r re co rd in g  
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
(2) Close the LCD panel.  
(3) Eject the cassette.  
(4) Attach the lens cap.  
(5) Remove the battery pack.  
After using your camcorder  
Remove the battery pack from your camcorder to avoid turning on the built-in light  
accidentally.  
Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n  
The LCD panel can be opened up to 90 degrees. The LCD panel moves about 90 degrees  
to the viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to the lens side (from the initial opening  
position).  
180°  
90°  
When closing the LCD panel, set it vertically until it clicks, and swing it into the  
camcorder body.  
Note  
When using the LCD screen except in the mirror mode, the viewfinder is automatically  
turned off.  
Notes on the LCD screen  
When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight, the LCD screen may be  
difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the viewfinder.  
When you adjust angles of the LCD panel, make sure if the LCD panel is opened up to  
90 degrees.  
When recording w ith the LCD panel opened  
Recording time becomes a little shorter compared with when recording with the LCD  
panel closed.  
32  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Ad ju st in g t h e b rig h t n e ss o f t h e LCD scre e n  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR/ PLAYER or MEMORY.*  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select LCD BRIGHT in  
settings, then press the dial (p. 216).  
in the menu  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the brightness of the LCD screen with  
LCD BRIGHT, then press the dial.  
(4) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
2
LCD SET  
LCD BR I G HT  
LCD B.L.  
LCD COLOR  
RETURN  
[
]
:
MENU  
END  
MENU  
LCD screen backlight  
You can adjust the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings  
when using the battery pack (p. 216).  
Even if you adjust the LCD screen backlight, the recorded picture will not be affected.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
33  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Usin g t h e zo o m fe a t u re  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY.*  
Move the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Move it further for a faster zoom.  
Using the zoom function sparingly results in better-looking recordings.  
Tside: for telephoto (subject appears closer)  
Wside: for wide-angle (subject appears farther away)  
W
T
W
W
T
T
To use zoom greater than 20×  
Zoom greater than 20× is performed digitally. To activate digital zoom, select the digital  
zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu settings. The digital zoom function is set to OFF  
as a default setting (p. 212).  
The right side of the bar shows the digital  
zooming zone.  
W
T
The digital zooming zone appears when you  
select the digital zoom power in the menu  
settings.  
Notes on digital zoom  
Digital zoom power can be set to 40× or 700×.  
Digital zoom power can be set to 40× or 560×.  
The picture quality deteriorates as you move the power zoom lever towards the T”  
side.  
When you shoot close to a subject  
If you cannot get a sharp focus, move the power zoom lever to the Wside until the  
focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/ 8 inch)  
away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/ 2 inch)  
away in the wide-angle position.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
34  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Ad ju st in g t h e vie w fin d e r le n s  
If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder.  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the indicators in the viewfinder  
come into sharp focus.  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR/ PLAYER or MEMORY.*  
Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.  
The view finder lens  
adjustment lever  
Sh o o t in g w it h t h e Mirro r Mo d e  
The subject uses this feature to check his or her own image on the LCD screen while you  
look at the subject in the viewfinder.  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY, and rotate the LCD screen  
180 degrees.*  
The  
indicator appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD screen.  
Xz appears in the standby mode, and z appears in the recording mode. Some of other  
indicators appear mirror-reversed and others are not displayed.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
35  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Pictures in the mirror mode  
The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the picture will be normal  
when recorded.  
During recording in the mirror mode  
DATE and TIME on your camcorder do not work.  
In d ica t o rs d isp la ye d in t h e re co rd in g m o d e  
The indicators are not recorded on the tape.  
[a ] [b ] [c] [d ]  
[e ]  
[a ] [i] [c] [d ]  
[j]  
SP  
SP  
REC 0:00:01  
REC 0:00:01  
40min  
40min  
[f]  
[f]  
[g ]  
JUL  
4
2003  
12:05:56 PM  
[h ]  
[a ] :Remaining battery time indicator  
[b ] :Format indicator  
[c] : Mirror mode indicator  
Recording mode indicator  
[d ] :STBY/REC indicator  
/
[e ] :Tape photo recording indicator  
Time code indicator  
/
[f] : Remaining tape indicator  
This appears after you set the POWER switch to CAMERA and insert a cassette for  
a while.  
This appears after you insert a cassette and record or play back for a while.  
[g ] :Date indicator  
This is displayed for five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or  
MEMORY.*  
[h ] :Time indicator  
This is displayed for five seconds after the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or  
MEMORY.*  
[i] : Hi8 format indicator  
This appears while playing back or recording Hi8 format tapes.  
[j] : Tape counter indicator  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
36  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Remaining battery time indicator  
The remaining battery time indicator indicates the approximate recording time. The  
indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are recording.  
When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the  
correct remaining battery time in minutes to be displayed.  
Time code (for tapes recorded in the Digital8 system only)  
When you play back tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm system, the  
tape counter appears on the screen.  
The time code indicates the recording or playback time, 0:00:00(hours:minutes:  
seconds) in CAMERA mode and 0:00:00:00(hours:minutes:seconds:frames) in VCR  
mode. You cannot rewrite only the time code. You cannot reset the time code or the  
tape counter.  
Data code  
The data code (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed while  
recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto tape. To display the data  
code, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during playback (p. 47).  
37  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Sh o o t in g a b a cklit su b je ct BACK LIGHT  
When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a  
light background, use the backlight function.  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY, and press BACK LIGHT.*  
The . indicator appears on the screen.  
To cancel the backlight function, press BACK LIGHT again.  
BACK LIGHT  
If you press EXPOSURE w hen shooting backlit subjects  
The backlight function will be canceled.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
38  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Sh o o t in g in t h e d a rk Nig h t Sh o t  
Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t  
Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r  
The NightShot function enables you to shoot a subject in a dark place. For example, you  
can satisfactorily record the environment of nocturnal animals for observation when  
you use this function.  
Usin g Nig h t Sh o t  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY, and slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.*  
The  
indicator and NIGHTSHOTflash on the screen.  
To cancel the NightShot function, slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.  
COLOR SLOW S  
SUPER NS  
NIGHTSHOT  
OFF ON  
Infrared rays  
(NightShot Light)  
emitter  
Usin g t h e Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t  
The Super NightShot function makes subjects up to 16 times brighter than those  
recorded in the NightShot mode.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, and slide NIGHTSHOT to ON. The  
indicator and NIGHTSHOTflash on the screen.  
(2) Press SUPER NS. The  
indicator and SUPER NIGHTSHOTflash on the  
screen.  
To cancel the Super NightShot function, press SUPER NS again. Your  
camcorder returns to the NightShot mode.  
Usin g t h e Nig h t Sh o t Lig h t  
The picture will be clearer with the NightShot Light on. To enable NightShot Light, set  
N.S.LIGHT to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.) (p. 213)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
39  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Usin g Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r  
The Color Slow Shutter function enables you to record color images in a dark place.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, and slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.  
(2) Press COLOR SLOW S.  
The  
indicator and COLOR SLOW SHUTTER flash on the screen.  
To cancel the Color Slow Shutter function, press COLOR SLOW S again.  
Notes  
Do not use the NightShot function in bright places (e.g. outdoors in the daytime). This  
may cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
When you keep NIGHTSHOT set to ON in normal recording, the picture may be  
recorded in incorrect or unnatural colors.  
If focusing is difficult with the autofocus mode when using the NightShot function,  
focus manually.  
While using the NightShot function, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
Exposure  
PROGRAM AE  
While using the Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter function, you cannot use  
the follow ing functions  
Fader  
:
Digital effect  
Exposure  
PROGRAM AE  
While using the Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter function  
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted depending on the brightness. The motion of  
the picture will be slow.  
NightShot Light  
NightShot Light rays are infrared and so are invisible. The maximum shooting distance  
using the NightShot Light is about 3 m (10 feet).  
While recording, be sure not to cover the infrared rays emitter with your fingers, etc.  
In total darkness  
The Color Slow Shutter function may not work normally.  
40  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
Recording with the self-timer starts in 10 seconds automatically. You can also use the  
Remote Commander for this operation.  
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SELFTIMER in  
dial.  
, then press the  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(4) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(5) Press START/ STOP.  
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of  
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.  
START/STOP  
START/STOP  
3
CAMERA SET  
SELFTIMER  
OFF  
ON  
D
ZOOM  
16:9WIDE  
STEADYSHOT  
N.S.LIGHT  
RETURN  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n  
Press START/ STOP.  
To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.  
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings in the standby mode.  
You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:  
Self-timer recording is finished.  
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
You can also record still images on a Memory Stickwith the self-timer (p. 135).  
41  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Su p e rim p o sin g t h e d a t e a n d t im e o n p ict u re s  
You can record the date and/ or time displayed on the screen superimposed on the  
picture.  
Carry out the following operations in CAMERA mode.  
Press DATE to record the date.  
Press TIME to record the time.  
Press DATE (or TIME), then press TIME (or DATE) to record the date and time.  
Press DATE and/ or TIME again. The date and/ or time indicator disappears.  
CCD-TRV418  
DATE  
TIME  
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock is not set up yet. Set the date and time to  
your local time before using (p. 26).  
Note  
The date and time indicators recorded manually cannot be deleted.  
If you do not record the date and time in the picture  
Record the date and time in the black screen as the background for about 10 seconds,  
then erase the date and time indicators before starting actual recording.  
42  
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s END SEARCH  
EDITSEARCH  
Re c Re vie w  
You can use these buttons to check the recorded picture for making the transition  
between the last recorded scene and the next scene you record smooth.  
END SEARCH  
EDITSEARCH  
END SEARCH  
You can go to the end of the recorded section after you record.  
In the standby mode, press END SEARCH.  
The last five seconds of the recorded section are played back and your camcorder  
returns to the standby mode. You can monitor the sound from the speaker.  
EDITSEARCH  
You can search for the next recording start point.  
In the standby mode, hold down the either side of EDITSEARCH. The recorded portion  
is played back.  
+ : To go forward  
7 : To go backward  
Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/ STOP, re-recording begins  
from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound.  
Re c Re vie w  
You can check the last recorded section.  
In the standby mode, press the 7 side of EDITSEARCH momentarily.  
The section you have stopped most recently will be played back for a few seconds, and  
then your camcorder will return to the standby mode. You can monitor the sound from  
the speaker.  
43  
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s END SEARCH  
EDITSEARCH  
Re c Re vie w  
Notes  
The end search, edit search and Rec Review functions do not work with tapes  
recorded in the Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm system.  
If you start recording after using the end search function, occasionally, the transition  
between the last scene you recorded and the next scene may not be smooth.  
Once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape, the end search  
function does not work.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The end search function may not work correctly.  
44  
— Pla yb a ck – Ba sics —  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
You can monitor the playback picture on the LCD screen. If you close the LCD panel,  
you can monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder.  
You can control playback using the Remote Commander supplied with your  
camcorder.  
(1) Install the power source and insert the recorded tape.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR/ PLAYER while pressing the small green button.*  
(3) Open the LCD panel while pressing OPEN.  
(4) Press m to rewind the tape.  
(5) Press N to start playback.  
(6) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME. When you  
close the LCD panel, sound is muted.  
– : To turn the volume down  
+ : To turn the volume up  
4
5
PLAY  
REW  
2
6
3
VOLUME  
1
To st o p p la yb a ck  
Press x.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
45  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
If you leave the pow er on for a long time  
Your camcorder gets warm. This is not a malfunction.  
Tapes that can be played back  
Tapes recorded in the Digital8 system  
Tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm system  
When monitoring on the LCD screen  
You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the LCD  
screen facing out.  
When you open or close the LCD panel  
Make sure that the LCD panel is set vertically.  
46  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
To d isp la y t h e scre e n in d ica t o rs Disp la y fu n ct io n  
Press DISPLAY on the Remote Commander.  
Press DISPLAY on your camcorder.  
The indicators appear on the screen.  
To make the indicators disappear, press DISPLAY again.  
DATA CODE  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
Ab o u t d a t a co d e  
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Your camcorder automatically records not only pictures on the tape but also the data  
code (date/ time or various settings when recorded).  
1 Set the POWER sw itch to VCR, then play back a tape.  
2 Press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander.  
The display changes as follows:  
date/ time t various settings t no indicator  
Date/time  
Various settings  
0:00:23:01  
0:00:23:01  
50min  
[a ]  
50min  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
[e ]  
[f]  
AUTO  
60 AWB  
JUL  
12:05:56 PM  
4
2003  
F1.6  
9dB  
[g ]  
[a ]: Time code/ Tape counter  
[b ]: SteadyShot off  
[c]: Exposure mode  
[d ]: White balance  
[e ]: Gain  
[f]: Shutter speed  
[g ]: Aperture value  
47  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
To not display various settings  
Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings (p. 222).  
The display changes as follows when you press DATA CODE on the Remote  
Commander:  
date/ time y no indicator  
Notes on the data code  
The data code does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm  
system.  
Various settings of the data code are not recorded when recording images on a  
Memory Stick.”  
Data code (Various settings)  
The data code is your camcorders information at the time of recording. In the recording  
mode, the data code will not be displayed.  
When you use data code, bars (-- -- --) appear if  
A blank portion of the tape is being played back.  
The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise.  
:
The tape was recorded by a camcorder without the date and time set.  
Data code  
When you connect your camcorder to a TV, the data code appears on the TV screen.  
Remaining battery time indicator during playback  
The indicator indicates the approximate continuous playback time. The indicator may  
not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are playing back. When you  
close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct  
remaining battery time to be displayed.  
48  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
Va rio u s p la yb a ck m o d e s  
To operate the video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR/ PLAYER.*  
To p a u se p la yb a ck (vie w in g a st ill im a g e )  
Press X during playback. To resume normal playback, press X or N.  
To a d va n ce t h e t a p e  
Press M in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.  
To re w in d t h e t a p e  
Press m in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.  
To ch a n g e t h e p la yb a ck d ire ct io n  
Press  
on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction.  
To resume normal playback, press N.  
To lo ca t e a sce n e m o n it o rin g t h e p ict u re (p ict u re se a rch )  
Keep pressing m or M during playback. To resume normal playback, release the  
button.  
To m o n it o r h ig h -sp e e d p ict u re s w h ile a d va n cin g o r re w in d in g  
t h e t a p e (skip sca n )  
Keep pressing m while rewinding or M while advancing the tape. To resume  
rewinding or advancing, release the button.  
To vie w p ict u re s a t slo w sp e e d (slo w p la yb a ck)  
Press y on the Remote Commander during playback. To resume normal playback,  
press N.  
To ch a n g e t h e slo w p la yb a ck d ire ct io n  
Press  
, then press y on the Remote Commander.  
To vie w p ict u re s a t d o u b le sp e e d  
Press ×2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the  
reverse direction, press  
normal playback, press N.  
, then press ×2 on the Remote Commander. To resume  
To vie w p ict u re s fra m e -b y-fra m e  
Press C on the Remote Commander in the playback pause mode. For frame-by-frame  
playback in the reverse direction, press c. To resume normal playback, press N.  
To se a rch t h e la st sce n e re co rd e d (END SEARCH)  
Press END SEARCH in the stop mode. The last five seconds of the recorded section are  
played back and playback stops.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
49  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
In the various playback modes  
The previous recording may appear as a mosaic image when playing back in the  
Digital8 system.  
Noise may appear when your camcorder plays back tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/
standard 8 mm system.  
Sound is muted.  
When the playback pause mode lasts for a certain period *  
Your camcorder automatically stops. To resume playback, press N.  
Note on the slow playback mode in Digital8 system  
The slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder, however, this  
function does not work for an output image from the DV jack.  
If slow playback lasts for about one minute  
Your camcorder automatically returns to normal speed playback.  
When you play back a tape recorded in the LP mode  
Noise may appear on the LCD screen in the following cases:  
slow playback  
playback pause  
picture search  
* three minutes:  
five minutes:  
50  
Vie w in g re co rd in g s o n TV  
Connect your camcorder to your TV with the A/ V connecting cable supplied with your  
camcorder to watch playback pictures on the TV screen. You can operate the video  
control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the LCD  
screen. When monitoring playback pictures on the TV screen, we recommend that you  
power your camcorder from a wall outlet using the AC Adaptor (p. 24). Refer to the  
operating instructions of your TV.  
Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV using the A/ V connecting cable  
supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the TV/ VCR selector on the TV to VCR.  
Yellow  
White  
IN  
S VIDEO  
TV  
A/ V connecting cable  
(supplied)  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
AUDIO/ A/V OUT  
VIDEO  
Red  
S VIDEO S VIDEO OUT  
: Signal flow  
Yellow  
IN  
CCD-TRV418  
S VIDEO  
TV  
A/ V connecting cable  
(supplied)  
VIDEO  
A/V OUT  
AUDIO  
S VIDEO OUT  
: Signal flow  
Black  
51  
Vie w in g re co rd in g s o n TV  
If yo u r TV is a lre a d y co n n e ct e d t o a VCR  
Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on the VCR by using the A/ V connecting  
cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.  
If yo u r TV o r VCR is a m o n a u ra l t yp e  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white  
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,  
the right channel audio is output.  
To co n n e ct t o a TV w it h o u t Vid e o /Au d io in p u t ja cks  
Use an NTSC system RFU adaptor (optional).  
Refer to the operating instructions of your TV and the RFU adaptor.  
If yo u r TV is a st e re o t yp e  
Connect the audio plug of the A/ V connecting cable supplied to the left (white) input  
jack of your TV.  
Note  
Noise appears on the TV screen in the various playback modes.  
If your TV has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With  
this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks on both your  
camcorder and the TV.  
To display the screen indicators on TV  
Set DISPLAY to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings (p. 222).  
Then, press DISPLAY on your camcorder. To turn the screen indicators off, press  
DISPLAY on your camcorder again.  
52  
Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Op e ra t io n s —  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry  
St ickw h ile re co rd in g o n a t a p e  
You can record still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or standby  
mode.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder (p. 127).  
In the standby mode or during tape recording, press PHOTO deeper.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
The still image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the Memory  
Stick.”  
50min  
REC  
0:00:01  
In the standby mode  
You can check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. The CAPTURE  
indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the still image, release  
PHOTO, select a still image again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly.  
Approximate number of images that can be recorded  
50min  
FINE  
26  
CAPTURE  
101  
In the recording mode  
You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly.  
53  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” w h ile re co rd in g o n a  
t a p e  
“Memory Stick”  
For more information, see page 240.  
Notes  
• Do not shake or strike your camcorder when you record still images. The image may  
fluctuate.  
• You cannot record still images on a “Memory Stick” in the following functions (The  
indicator flashes):  
– Wide mode  
– BOUNCE  
– MEMORY MIX  
– END SEARCH  
The follow ing settings cannot be changed  
The settings you selected when the POWER switch was set to MEMORY are used:  
– Image quality (p. 128)  
– Recording folder (p. 162)  
To record still images using the Remote Commander  
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder immediately records the  
image on the screen.  
During and after recording still images on a “Memory Stick”  
Your camcorder continues recording on tape.  
Title  
The title cannot be recorded.  
While recording still images on a “Memory Stick” in CAMERA mode  
The image is recorded in the FIELD mode automatically even if you select FRAME in  
the menu settings.  
54  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ickw h ile re co rd in g o n a  
t a p e  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
You can record still images on a Memory Stickwith the self-timer. You can also use  
the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder (p. 127).  
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SELFTIMER in  
, then press the  
dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(4) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(5) Press PHOTO deeper.  
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of  
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.  
5
PHOTO  
3
CAMERA SET  
OFF  
ON  
SELFTIMER  
D
ZOOM  
16:9WIDE  
STEADYSHOT  
N.S.LIGHT  
RETURN  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r  
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings in the standby mode.  
You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:  
self-timer recording is finished.  
the POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
Taking photos w ith the self-timer  
The self-timer can only be operated when in the standby mode.  
55  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e  
Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g  
You can record a still image like a photograph.  
You can record about 510 images in the SP mode and about 765 images in the LP mode  
on a tape which can record for 60 minutes in the SP mode.  
In the standby mode or during tape recording, press PHOTO deeper.  
The still image on the screen is recorded for about seven seconds. The sound during  
those seven seconds is also recorded.  
The still image is displayed on the screen until recording is completed.  
•••••••  
DCR-TRV250  
In the standby mode  
You can check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. The CAPTURE  
indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the still image, release  
PHOTO, select a still image again, and then press and hold PHOTO lightly.  
CAPTURE  
56  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Notes  
• During Tape Photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting.  
• You cannot use PHOTO while using BOUNCE in the Fader function.  
• When recording a still image, do not shake your camcorder. The image may fluctuate.  
• The tape photo recording does not work while using Fader (The  
flashes).  
indicator  
If you record a moving subject w ith the tape photo recording function  
The image may fluctuate when you play back the still image on other equipment.  
This is not a malfunction.  
To use the tape photo recording function using the Remote Commander  
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder records an image on the  
screen immediately.  
57  
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e  
If you connect a TV compatible with the ID-1/ ID-2 system, the screen size is  
automatically selected.  
You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on the 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE).  
[b ]  
16:9WIDE  
16:9WIDE  
[a]  
[c]  
[d ]  
[a ]: Recording in the 16:9WIDE mode  
[b ]: Playback on a normal TV  
[c]: Playback on a wide TV in the normal screen mode  
[d ]: Full screen mode on a wide TV  
In the standby mode, set 16:9WIDE to ON in  
in the menu settings (p. 212).  
CAMERA SET  
SELFT I MER  
D
ZOOM  
16:9W I DE  
OFF  
STEADYSHOT ON  
N.S.LIGHT  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
58  
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e  
You can record a cinema-like picture (CINEMA) or a 16:9 wide picture (16:9FULL) to  
watch on the 16:9 wide-screen TV. Refer to the operating instructions of your TV.  
[b]  
CINEMA  
CINEMA  
[a]  
[d]  
[c]  
[b]  
[c]  
16:9FULL  
16:9FULL  
[e]  
[f]  
[a ]: Recording in the CINEMA mode  
[b]: Playback on a normal TV  
[c]: Playback on a wide TV in the normal screen mode  
[d]: Zoom mode on a wide TV  
[e ]: Recording in the 16:9FULL mode  
[f]: Full mode on a wide TV  
In the standby mode, set 16:9WIDE to CINEMA or 16:9FULL in  
settings (p. 212).  
in the menu  
CAMERA SET  
ZOOM  
16:9W I DE  
STEADYSHOT CINEMA  
D
OFF  
16:9FULL  
N.S.LIGHT  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
CCD-TRV418  
MENU  
59  
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e  
To ca n ce l t h e w id e m o d e  
In the standby mode, set the wide mode to OFF in the menu settings.  
In the w ide mode  
You cannot operate the following functions:  
OLD MOVIE  
(p. 65)  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin tape recording or tape recording  
standby  
BOUNCE (p. 61)  
Connection for a TV  
Pictures recorded in the 16:9WIDE mode automatically appear on the TV screen at full  
size when:  
You connect your camcorder to a TV that is compatible with the video ID (ID-1/ ID-2)  
system.  
You connect your camcorder to the S video jack on the TV.  
ID-1 system  
The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio (screen horizontal/ vertical ratio) information (16:9,  
4:3, or letter box) with video signals.  
ID-2 system  
The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection signal with ID-1 signals inserted between  
video signals when you connect your camcorder to other equipment by an A/ V  
connecting cable.  
In the w ide mode  
The SteadyShot does not work. If you set the wide mode described below in the menu  
settings when the SteadyShot is working, the  
does not function:  
indicator flashes and the SteadyShot  
16:9WIDE to ON  
16:9WIDE to 16:9FULL  
Date or time indicator  
When you record in the 16:9FULL mode, the date or time indicator will be widened on  
wide-screen TVs.  
60  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
You can fade in or out to give your recording a professional appearance.  
FADER  
M.FADER  
(mosaic)  
STRIPE  
1) 2)  
BOUNCE * *  
2)  
OVERLAP *  
2)  
WIPE *  
2)  
DOT *  
(random dot)  
MONOTONE  
When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to color.  
When fading out, the picture gradually changes from color to black-and-white.  
1)  
* You can use BOUNCE when D ZOOM is set to OFF in the menu setting.  
2)  
* Fade in only  
61  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
(1) To fade in [a ]  
In the standby mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.  
To fade out [b ]  
In the recording mode, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
FADER t M.FADER t STRIPE t BOUNCE t MONOTONE  
no indicator  
DOT  
WIPE  
OVERLAP  
The last selected fader mode is indicated first of all.  
(2) Press START/ STOP. The fader indicator stops flashing.  
After fade in/ out ends, your camcorder automatically returns to the normal  
mode.  
1
FADER  
FADER  
To ca n ce l t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
Before pressing START/ STOP, press FADER repeatedly until the indicator disappears.  
Notes  
The OVERLAP, WIPE and DOT functions do not work with tapes recorded in the  
Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm system.  
You cannot use the following functions while using the fader function. Also, you  
cannot use the fader function while using the following functions:  
Digital effect  
Color Slow Shutter  
Super NightShot  
Tape Photo recording  
Interval recording  
Frame recording  
62  
Usin g t h e fa d e r fu n ct io n  
When you set the POWER sw itch to MEMORY  
You cannot use the fader function.  
When you select OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT  
Your camcorder automatically stores the picture recorded on the tape. While the picture  
is being stored, the indicator flashes fast, and the picture from the tape appears on the  
screen. At this stage, the picture may not be recorded clearly, depending on the tape  
condition.  
The date, time indicator  
and title do not fade in or fade out  
Erase them before operating the fader function if they are not needed.  
While using the bounce mode, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
– Recording on a “Memory Stick”  
– Exposure  
– Focus  
– Zoom  
– Picture effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
– BACK LIGHT  
Note on the bounce mode  
The BOUNCE indicator does not appear in the following functions:  
– When D ZOOM is set to 40× or 700×.  
– When D ZOOM is set to 40× or 560×.  
– Wide mode  
– Picture effect  
– PROGRAM AE  
63  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Pict u re e ffe ct  
You can digitally process pictures to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV.  
NEG. ART [a ] : The color and brightness of the picture are reversed.  
SEPIA :  
The picture appears in sepia.  
B&W :  
The picture appears in monochrome (black-and-white).  
SOLARIZE [b ] : The picture appears as an illustration with strong contrast.  
SLIM [c] : The picture expands vertically.  
STRETCH [d ] : The picture expands horizontally.  
PASTEL [e ] :  
The picture appears as a pale pastel drawing.  
MOSAIC [f] : The picture appears mosaic.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
[e ]  
[f]  
(1) In CAMERA mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select P EFFECT in  
, then press the dial  
(p. 211).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect mode, then  
press the dial.  
MANUA L S E T  
PROGRAM AE  
O F F  
NE G  
S E P  
2
.
A R T  
A
P
D
E F F E C T  
E F F E C T  
I
F L A S H M O D E B &  
W
AUTO SHTR  
RETURN  
S OL A R I  
S L  
Z
E
I
M
S T RE T C H  
P A S T E  
MOS A  
L
C
I
[
]
:
MENU  
END  
MENU  
To ca n ce l Pict u re e ffe ct  
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
While using Picture effect  
You cannot select OLD MOVIE with Digital effect.  
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG)  
Picture effect is automatically canceled.  
64  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Dig it a l e ffe ct  
You can add special effects to recorded images using the various digital functions. The  
sound is recorded normally.  
STILL  
You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.  
FLASH (FLASH MOTION)  
You can record still images successively at regular intervals.  
LUMI. (LUMINANCE KEY)  
You can swap the brighter area in a still image with a moving picture.  
TRAIL  
You can record a picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.  
SLOW SHTR (SLOW SHUTTER)  
You can slow down the shutter speed. The slow shutter mode is good for recording  
dark pictures more brightly.  
OLD MOVIE  
You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. Your camcorder automatically  
changes the screen format to wide and the color to sepia and set the appropriate shutter  
speed.  
Still image  
Moving picture  
STILL  
LUMI.  
Still image  
Moving picture  
65  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Dig it a l e ffe ct  
(1) In CAMERA mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select D EFFECT in  
(p. 211).  
, then press the dial  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired digital effect mode.  
(4) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial. The bars appear on the screen. In the STILL  
and LUMI. modes, the still image is stored in memory.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect, then press the dial.  
Effect  
Items to be adjusted  
STILL  
The degree of still image you want to superimpose on the moving  
picture.  
FLASH  
LUMI.  
The interval of flash motion.  
The brightness of the area in the still image which is to be swapped  
with a moving picture.  
TRAIL  
The vanishing time of the incidental picture.  
SLOW SHTR Shutter speed. The larger the shutter speed number, the slower the  
shutter speed becomes.  
OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary.  
The more bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect. The bars appear  
in the following modes: STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.  
MENU  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
D
D
OFF  
2
4
STILL  
FLASH  
LUMI.  
LUMI.  
I I I I I I I I •  
TRAIL  
SLOW SHTR  
OLD MOVIE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l Dig it a l e ffe ct  
Set D EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
66  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Dig it a l e ffe ct  
Notes  
The following functions do not work during digital effects:  
Fader  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
The PROGRAM AE function does not work in the slow shutter mode.  
The following functions do not work in the OLD MOVIE mode:  
Wide mode  
Picture effect  
PROGRAM AE  
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG)  
Digital effect is automatically canceled.  
When recording in the slow shutter mode  
Auto focus may not be effective. Focus manually using a tripod.  
Shutter speed  
Shutter speed number  
SLOW SHTR 1  
SLOW SHTR 2  
SLOW SHTR 3  
SLOW SHTR 4  
Shutter speed  
1/ 30  
1/ 15  
1/ 8  
1/ 4  
67  
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE fu n ct io n  
You can select the PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) mode to suit your specific shooting  
requirements.  
(SPOTLIGHT)  
This mode prevents peoples faces, for example, from appearing excessively white  
when shooting subjects lit by strong light in the theater.  
(PORTRAIT)  
This mode brings out the subject while creating a soft background for subjects such as  
people or flowers.  
(SPORTS)  
This mode minimizes camera shake on fast-moving subjects such as in tennis or golf.  
(BEACH & SKI)  
This mode prevents peoples faces from appearing dark in strong light or reflected light,  
such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope.  
(SUNSETMOON)  
This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere when you are recording sunsets, general  
night views, fireworks displays and neon signs.  
(LANDSCAPE)  
This mode is for when you record distant subjects such as mountains and prevents your  
camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh in windows when you record a subject  
behind glass or a screen.  
68  
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE fu n ct io n  
(1) In CAMERA or MEMORY mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.*  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PROGRAM AE in  
, then press the  
dial (p. 211).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial.  
2
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE AUTO  
P
D
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
SPOTLIGHT  
PORTRAIT  
FLASH MODE SPORTS  
AUTO SHTR BEACH&SKI  
RETURN  
SUNSETMOON  
LANDSCAPE  
[
]
MENU : END  
MENU  
To ca n ce l t h e PROGRAM AE fu n ct io n  
Set PROGRAM AE to AUTO in the menu settings.  
Notes  
In the SPOTLIGHT, SPORTS and BEACH & SKI modes, you cannot take close-ups.  
This is because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far  
distance.  
In the SUNSETMOON and LANDSCAPE modes, your camcorder is set to focus only  
on distant subjects.  
The following functions do not work in the PROGRAM AE function:  
Color Slow Shutter  
SLOW SHUTTER  
OLD MOVIE  
BOUNCE  
PROGRAM AE function does not work in the following cases (The indicator flashes):  
When using MEMORY MIX on a Memory Stick.”  
When NIGHTSHOT is set to ON.  
If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium  
lamp or mercury lamp  
Flickering or changes in color may occur in the following modes. If this happens, turn  
the PROGRAM AE function off:  
PORTRAIT  
SPORTS  
Even if the PROGRAM AE function is selected  
You can adjust the exposure.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
69  
Ad ju st in g t h e e xp o su re m a n u a lly  
You can manually adjust and set the exposure. Normally, exposure is automatically  
adjusted.  
Adjust the exposure manually in the following cases:  
When the subject is backlit.  
When shooting bright subjects against dark backgrounds.  
When recording dark pictures (e.g. night scenes) faithfully.  
(1) In CAMERA or MEMORY mode, press EXPOSURE.* The exposure indicator  
appears on the screen.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the brightness.  
1
EXPOSURE  
2
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re m o d e  
Press EXPOSURE.  
Note  
When you adjust the exposure manually, the following functions do not work:  
Color Slow Shutter  
BACK LIGHT  
Your camcorder automatically returns to the automatic exposure mode:  
If you change the PROGRAM AE mode.  
If you slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
70  
Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly  
You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases:  
The autofocus mode is not effective when shooting:  
Subjects through glass covered with water droplets.  
Horizontal stripes.  
Subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls or the sky.  
When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in  
the background.  
Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod.  
Normally, focus is automatically adjusted.  
(1) In CAMERA or MEMORY mode, press FOCUS.* The 9 indicator appears on  
the screen.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to sharpen focus.  
FOCUS  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s m o d e  
Press FOCUS.  
To focus precisely  
It is easier to focus on subjects if you adjust the zoom to shoot at the W(wide-angle)  
after focusing at the T(telephoto) position.  
When you shoot close to the subject  
Focus at the end of the W(wide-angle) position.  
The 9 indicator changes to the follow ing indicators:  
when recording a distant subject.  
when the subject is too close to focus on.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
71  
In t e rva l re co rd in g  
Example  
You can make a time-lapse recording by  
setting your camcorder to automatically  
record and standby sequentially. You can  
achieve an excellent recording for flowering,  
gradual appearances, etc., with this function.  
1 S  
1 S  
[a]  
[b]  
[c]  
9 MIN 59 S  
10 MIN  
9 MIN 59 S  
10 MIN  
[a]: Recording time (REC TIME)  
[b]: Waiting time  
[c]: Interval time (INTERVAL)  
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select INT. REC in  
(p. 219).  
, then press the dial  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial.  
(4) Set INTERVAL and REC TIME.  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then  
press the dial.  
The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN  
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select REC TIME, then press the dial.  
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired recording time, then  
press the dial.  
The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC y 2SEC  
5 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
RETURN, then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(6) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear. The INTERVAL TAPE  
indicator flashes.  
(7) Press START/ STOP to start interval recording. The INTERVAL TAPE  
indicator lights up.  
72  
In t e rva l re co rd in g  
7
2,3  
TAPE SET  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUTO MODE  
REMAIN  
FRAME REC  
I NT. REC  
RETURN  
REC MODE  
AUTO MODE  
REMAIN  
FRAME REC  
I NT. REC  
RETURN  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
SET  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
TAPE SET  
4
REC MODE  
AUTO MODE  
REMAIN  
5
TAPE SET  
I NT. REC  
I NTERVAL 30SEC  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
TAPE SET  
I NT. REC  
FRAME REC  
I NT. REC  
RETURN  
ON  
OFF  
SET  
I NTERVAL 30SEC  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
1MIN  
5MIN  
10M IN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
TAPE SET  
I NT. REC  
TAPE SET  
I NT. REC  
6
I NTERVAL  
I NTERVAL  
REC TIME 0. 5SEC  
RETURN  
REC TIME 0. 5SEC  
RETURN  
1SEC  
1. 5SEC  
2SEC  
I NTERVAL  
TAPE  
MENU  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l in t e rva l re co rd in g  
Perform either of the following:  
Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings.  
Set the POWER switch to the position other than CAMERA.  
To p e rfo rm n o rm a l re co rd in g d u rin g in t e rva l re co rd in g  
You can perform normal recording only once during interval.  
Press START/ STOP. The INTERVAL TAPE indicator flashes, and normal recording  
starts. To stop normal recording, press START/ STOP again and the screen in step (6)  
appears.  
On recording time  
There may be a discrepancy in the recording time of up to +/ six frames from the  
selected time.  
73  
Fra m e b y fra m e re co rd in g  
– Fra m e re co rd in g  
You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using frame recording.  
To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make a frame recording.  
We recommend that you use a tripod, and operate your camcorder using the Remote  
Commander after step (5).  
(1) In the standby mode, press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select FRAME REC in  
, then press the  
dial (p. 219).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(4) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
The FRAME REC indicator appears.  
(5) Press START/ STOP to start frame recording. Your camcorder makes a  
recording for about six frames, and returns to recording standby.  
(6) Move the subject, and repeat step (5).  
5
4
3
REC MODE  
TAPE SET  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUTO MODE  
REMAIN  
FRAME REC ON  
I NT. REC  
RETURN  
AUTO MODE  
REMAIN  
FRAME REC  
FRAME REC OFF  
I NT. REC  
RETURN  
ON  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l t h e fra m e re co rd in g  
Perform either of the following:  
– Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings.  
– Set the POWER switch to the position other than CAMERA.  
Note  
The remaining tape time is not indicated correctly if you use this function continuously.  
When using the frame recording function  
The last recorded cut is longer than other cuts.  
74  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le  
You can select one of the eight preset titles and the two custom titles (p. 77). You can  
also select the language, color, size and position of titles.  
VACATION  
(1) In the standby mode, press TITLE to display the title menu. The title menu  
display appears on the screen.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
, then press the dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial.  
The titles are displayed in the language you selected.  
(4) Change the color, size, or position, if necessary.  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select COLOR, SIZE, or POSITION, then  
press the dial. The selected item appears on the screen.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the  
dial.  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired.  
(5) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting.  
(6) Press START/ STOP to start recording.  
(7) When you want to stop recording the title, press TITLE.  
1
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
TITLE  
2
3
4
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
VACATION  
THE END  
VACATION  
THE END  
RETURN  
[
]
[
]
TITLE : END  
TITLE : END  
VACATION  
THE END  
[
]
TITLE : END  
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
TITLE  
VACATION  
VACATION  
THE END  
RETURN  
[
]
[
]
TITLE : END  
TITLE : END  
SIZE  
SMALL  
TITLE  
SIZE  
LARGE  
VACATION  
VACATION  
[
]
TITLE : END  
75  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le  
To su p e rim p o se t h e t it le w h ile yo u a re re co rd in g  
Press TITLE while you are recording, and carry out steps (2) to (5). When you press the  
SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial at step (5), the title is recorded.  
To se le ct t h e la n g u a g e o f a p re se t t it le  
If you want to change the language, select  
before step (2). Then select the desired  
language and return to step (2).  
Note  
The date and time, or either of them, may not be displayed depending on the size or  
position of the title.  
If you display the menu w hile superimposing a title  
The title is not recorded while the menu is displayed.  
To use a custom title  
If you want to use a custom title, select  
in step (2).  
Title setting  
The title color changes as follows:  
WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE  
The title size changes as follows:  
SMALL y LARGE  
You cannot input 13 characters or more in LARGE size. If you input more than 12  
characters, the title size returns to SMALL even if you select LARGE.  
The title position changes as follows:  
1 y 2 y 3 y 4 y 5 y 6 y 7 y 8 y 9  
The larger the position number, the lower the title is positioned.  
When you select the title size LARGE,you cannot choose position 9.  
In CINEMA mode, you cannot choose position 9 for SMALLsize titles, and position  
8 or 9 for LARGEsize titles.  
When you are selecting and setting the title  
You cannot record the title displayed on the screen.  
When you superimpose a title w hile you are recording  
The beep does not sound.  
While you are playing back  
You can superimpose a title. However, the title is not recorded on the tape.  
You can record a title when you dub a tape by connecting your camcorder to a VCR  
with the A/ V connecting cable.  
If you use the i.LINK cable instead of the A/ V connecting cable, you cannot record the  
title.  
76  
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s  
You can make up to two titles and store them in your camcorder. Each title can have up  
to 20 characters.  
(1) In CAMERA or VCR/ PLAYER mode, press TITLE.*  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
, then press the dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET,  
then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,  
then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the  
dial.  
(6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) until you have selected all characters and completed  
the title.  
(7) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SET,  
then press the dial. The title is stored in memory.  
(8) Press TITLE to make the title menu disappear.  
1
TITLE SET  
CUSTOM1 SET  
CUSTOM2 SET  
TITLE SET  
CUSTOM1 SET  
CUSTOM2 SET  
RETURN  
TITLE  
2
3
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
[
] :  
TITLE END  
[
] :  
TITLE END  
VACATION  
THE END  
TITLE SET  
TITLE SET  
P1  
CUSTOM1 SET  
CUSTOM2 SET  
RETURN  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
[
] :  
TITLE END  
ABCDE 12345 $F¥  
DM  
£
¿
FGHIJ 67890  
i ø ” :  
KLMNO ÀÈÌÒÙ  
[
C
]
PQRST ÁÉÍÓÚ [ cP2 ]  
UVWXY ÂÊÔÆŒ [ SET ]  
ç
Z& ?! ÃÕÑ  
ß
. , / – ÄÏÖÜÅ  
[
]
[
] :  
TITLE END  
TITLE : END  
TITLE SET  
P1  
TITLE SET  
P1  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
4
6
ABCDE 12345 $F¥  
DM  
£
ABCDE 12345 $F¥  
DM  
£
¿
¿
FGHIJ 67890  
i ø ” :  
FGHIJ 67890  
i ø ” :  
KLMNO ÀÈÌÒÙ  
[
C
]
KLMNO ÀÈÌÒÙ  
[
C
]
PQRST ÁÉÍÓÚ [ cP2 ]  
PQRST ÁÉÍÓÚ [ cP2 ]  
UVWXY ÂÊÔÆŒ [ SET ]  
UVWXY ÂÊÔÆŒ [ SET ]  
ç
ç
ß
Z& ? ! ÃÕÑ  
.  
ß
Z& ? ! ÃÕÑ  
.  
,
/
ÄÏÖÜÅ  
,
/
ÄÏÖÜÅ  
[
]
[
]
TITLE : END  
TITLE : END  
TITLE SET  
P1  
TITLE SET  
P1  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
S_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
ABCDE 12345 $F¥  
DM  
£
ABCDE 12345 $F¥  
DM  
£
¿
¿
FGHIJ 67890  
i ø ” :  
FGHIJ 67890  
i ø ” :  
KLMNO ÀÈÌÒÙ  
[
C
]
KLMNO ÀÈÌÒÙ  
[
C
]
PQRST ÁÉÍÓÚ [ cP2 ]  
PQRST ÁÉÍÓÚ [ cP2 ]  
UVWXY ÂÊÔÆŒ [ SET ]  
UVWXY ÂÊÔÆŒ [ SET ]  
ç
ç
ß
Z& ? ! ÃÕÑ  
ß
Z& ? ! ÃÕÑ  
.  
.  
,
/
ÄÏÖÜÅ  
,
/
ÄÏÖÜÅ  
[
]
[
]
TITLE : END  
TITLE : END  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
77  
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s  
To ch a n g e a t it le yo u h a ve st o re d  
In step (3), select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want  
to change, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press the dial to delete the title. The  
last character is erased. Enter the new title as desired.  
1)  
If it takes a certain period * or longer to enter characters in the standby mode  
w hile a cassette is in your camcorder  
The power automatically goes off. The characters you have entered remain stored in  
memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once, and turn it to CAMERA again,  
then start from step (1).  
We recommend setting the POWER switch to VCR/ PLAYER or removing the cassette  
so that your camcorder is not automatically turned off while you are entering title  
2)  
characters.*  
To erase a character  
Select [C]. The last character is erased.  
To enter a space  
Select [Z& ?!], then select the blank part between & and ?.  
If you select [  
]
The menu for selecting alphabet and Russian characters appears. Select [  
to the previous screen.  
] to return  
1)  
* three minutes:  
five minutes:  
2)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
78  
Usin g t h e b u ilt -in lig h t  
You can use the built-in light to suit your shooting situation. The recommended  
distance between the subject and camcorder is about 1.5 m (5 feet).  
In CAMERA or MEMORY mode, press LIGHT repeatedly until the  
appears on the screen.*  
indicator  
The indicator changes as follows:  
t
t
t no indicator  
The built-in light turns on.  
If you turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG), the built-in light turns off  
simultaneously. You cannot turn the built-in light on by turning the POWER switch to  
CAMERA or MEMORY again.* To turn on the built-in light again, press LIGHT again in  
CAMERA or MEMORY mode.*  
LIGHT  
Built-in light  
To t u rn o ff t h e b u ilt -in lig h t  
Press LIGHT repeatedly until no indicator appears on the screen.  
To t u rn o n t h e b u ilt -in lig h t a u t o m a t ica lly  
Press LIGHT repeatedly until the  
indicator appears on the screen.  
The built-in light automatically turns on and off according to the ambient brightness.  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to touch the lighting section, because the plastic w indow and  
surrounding surfaces are hot w hile the light is on. It remains hot for a w hile after  
the light is turned off.  
DANGER  
Not to be handled by children.  
Emits intense heat and light.  
Use w ith caution to reduce the risk of fire or injury to persons.  
Do not directly aim the light at persons or materials from less than 1.22 m (4 feet)  
aw ay during use and until the light becomes cool.  
Turn the built-in light off w hen not in use.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
79  
Usin g t h e b u ilt -in lig h t  
Notes  
The built-in light turns off automatically in the following cases:  
When you leave it on for more than five minutes with the POWER switch set to  
MEMORY.  
When it stays on in the AUTO mode (  
) for more than five minutes.  
When you leave it on for more than five minutes with no cassette inserted or after  
the tape has run out.  
To turn the built-in light on again, press LIGHT again.  
The battery pack discharges quickly while the built-in light is turned on. Turn it off  
when not in use.  
When you do not use your camcorder, turn the built-in light off and remove the  
battery pack to avoid turning on the built-in light accidentally.  
When flickering occurs while shooting in the AUTO mode (  
until the indicator appears.  
The built-in light may turn on/ off when you use the PROGRAM AE or backlight  
function while shooting in the AUTO mode ( ).  
), press LIGHT  
The built-in light may turn off when inserting or ejecting a cassette.  
The built-in light is turned off in the following cases:  
While the end search function is working  
Interval time of Interval recording  
When you use the conversion lens (optional), light from the built-in light is blocked  
and may not illuminate the subject properly.  
80  
Usin g t h e b u ilt -in lig h t  
Re p la cin g t h e b u lb  
Use the Sony XB-3D halogen lamp (optional). The supplied halogen lamp is not  
commercially available. Purchase the Sony XB-3D halogen lamp.  
Remove the power source before replacing the bulb.  
(1) Remove the built-in light unit while pushing the hole under the built-in light  
unit using a wire.  
(2) Turn the bulb housing counterclockwise and detach from the built-in light  
unit.  
(3) Replace the bulb using a dry cloth.  
(4) Attach the bulb housing by turning it clockwise, then replace the built-in light  
unit.  
1
4
2
3
NOTE  
Be sure to align the tab w ith  
the groove w hen inserting.  
CAUTION  
When replacing the bulb, use only the Sony XB-3D halogen lamp (optional) to reduce  
the risk of fire.  
To prevent possible burn hazard, disconnect the power source before replacing and  
do not touch the bulb until the bulb becomes cool enough to handle (for about 30  
minutes or more).  
Note  
To prevent the bulb from being smudged with finger prints, handle it with a dry cloth,  
etc. If the bulb is smudged, wipe it thoroughly.  
81  
In se rt in g a sce n e  
You can insert a scene in the middle of a recorded tape by setting the start and end  
points. The previously recorded frames between these start and end points will be  
erased.  
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
(1) In the standby mode, keep pressing EDITSEARCH, and release the button at  
the insert end point [b ].  
(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander.  
The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes and the counter resets to zero.  
(3) Keep pressing the 7 side of EDITSEARCH and release the button at the  
insert start point [a ].  
(4) Press START/ STOP to start recording.  
The scene is inserted. Recording stops automatically near the counter zero  
point. Your camcorder returns to the standby mode.  
The zero set memory function is canceled.  
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
EDITSEARCH  
Notes  
The zero set memory function does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/
standard 8 mm system.  
The picture and the sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted section when it  
is played back.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The zero set memory function may not work correctly.  
82  
Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck Op e ra t io n s —  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e w it h p ict u re e ffe ct s  
During playback, you can process a scene using the following picture effects:  
NEG.ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.  
(1) In the playback or playback pause mode, press MENU to display the menu  
settings.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select P EFFECT in  
, then press the dial  
(p. 211).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect mode, then  
press the dial.  
For details of each picture effect, see page 64.  
2
MANUAL SET  
P
D
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
OFF  
NEG. ART  
SEPIA  
B&W  
SOLARIZE  
RETURN  
1
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
To ca n ce l Pict u re e ffe ct  
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
83  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e w it h p ict u re e ffe ct s  
Notes  
You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder while you are processing the  
image using Picture effect. However, you can record images as follows:  
on a Memory Stickas a still image  
on a VCR using your camcorder as a player  
Picture effect does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8  
system.  
/ standard 8 mm  
You cannot process externally input scenes using Picture effect.  
Pictures processed by Picture effect  
Pictures processed by Picture effect are not output through the DV jack.  
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back  
Picture effect is automatically canceled.  
84  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e w it h d ig it a l e ffe ct s  
During playback, you can process a scene using the following digital effects:  
STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.  
(1) In the playback mode or playback pause mode, press MENU to display the  
menu settings.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select D EFFECT in  
, then press the dial  
(p. 211).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired digital effect mode, then  
press the dial. The bars appear on the screen.  
In the STILL or LUMI. mode, the picture shown when you press the SEL/  
PUSH EXEC dial is captured and stored in memory as a still image at the time.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect, then press the dial.  
For details of each digital effect, see page 65.  
MENU  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
OFF  
ST ILL  
FLASH  
LUMI.  
TRAIL  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
D
D
2
4
1
1
LUMI.  
I I I I I I I I •  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l Dig it a l e ffe ct  
Set D EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
85  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e w it h d ig it a l e ffe ct s  
Notes  
You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder while you are processing the  
image using Digital effect. However, you can record images as follows:  
on a Memory Stickas a still image  
on a VCR using your camcorder as a player  
Digital effect does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8  
system.  
/ standard 8 mm  
You cannot process externally input scenes using Digital effect.  
Pictures processed by Digital effect  
Pictures processed by Digital effect are not output through the DV jack.  
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back  
Digital effect is automatically canceled.  
86  
En la rg in g re co rd e d im a g e s  
Ta p e PB ZOOM  
You can enlarge an image recorded on tapes.  
Besides the operation described here, your camcorder can enlarge still images recorded  
on a Memory Stick(p. 172).  
(1) In the playback or playback pause mode, press PB ZOOM. The center of the  
image is enlarged to about twice its size, and  
appear on the screen.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the  
dial.  
: To view the upper part of the image  
: To view the lower part of the image  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the  
dial.  
: To view the left part of the image (Turn the dial downward.)  
: To view the right part of the image (Turn the dial upward.)  
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.  
You can enlarge the image from 1.1 times up to five times its size.  
W : To decrease the zoom ratio  
T : To increase the zoom ratio  
4
PB ZOOM  
× 2.0  
2
[
]
EXEC : T t  
PB ZOOM  
× 2.0  
3
1
[
]
EXEC : r R  
PB ZOOM  
To ca n ce l Ta p e PB ZOOM  
Press PB ZOOM.  
87  
En la rg in g re co rd e d im a g e s Ta p e PB ZOOM  
Notes  
You cannot record images on a tape or on a Memory Stickon your camcorder while  
you are processing the image using Tape PB ZOOM. However, you can record images  
on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.  
Tape PB ZOOM does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8  
system.  
/ standard 8 mm  
You cannot process externally input scenes using Tape PB ZOOM.  
Images in Tape PB ZOOM  
These images are not output through the DV jack.  
Tape PB ZOOM is automatically canceled w hen:  
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG).  
You stop playing back.  
You press MENU.  
You press TITLE.  
88  
Qu ickly lo ca t in g a sce n e  
ZERO SET MEMORY  
Your camcorder automatically searches for the scene having a tape counter value of  
0:00:00. ”  
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Use this function, for example, to view a desired scene later on during playback.  
(1) In the playback mode, press DISPLAY when the tape counter is not displayed  
on the screen.  
(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape  
counter shows 0:00:00,then starts counting.  
The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator flashes on the screen.  
(3) Press x when you want to stop playback.  
(4) Press m to rewind the tape to the counters zero point. The tape stops  
automatically when the counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO SET  
MEMORY indicator disappears, and the time code appears.  
(5) Press N. Playback starts from the counters zero point.  
DISPLAY  
ZERO SET MEMORY  
m
x
N
Notes  
The zero set memory does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/
standard 8 mm system.  
When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory  
is canceled.  
There may be a discrepancy of several seconds between the time code and the tape  
counter.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The zero set memory may not work correctly.  
The zero set memory also in the standby mode  
When you insert a scene in the middle of a recorded tape, press ZERO SET MEMORY at  
the point you want to end the insertion. Rewind the tape to the insert start point, and  
start recording. Recording stops automatically at the tape counter zero point. Your  
camcorder returns to the standby mode.  
89  
Se a rch in g fo r a re co rd in g b y d a t e  
DATE SEARCH  
Your camcorder can automatically search for the point where the recording date  
changes and starts playback from that point.  
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each  
recording date.  
JUL 4 2003  
JUL 5 2003  
DEC 31 2003  
[a ]  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
[b ]  
[c]  
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE  
SEARCH indicator appears on the screen. The indicator changes as follows:  
DATE SEARCH y (no indicator)  
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)  
(3) When the current position is [b ], press . to search toward [a ] or press >  
to search toward [c]. Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the point  
where the date changes.  
Each time you press . or >, your camcorder searches for the previous or  
next date.  
DATE  
SEARCH  
00  
2
3
SEARCH  
MODE  
DATE  
01  
SEARCH  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
90  
Se a rch in g fo r a re co rd in g b y d a t e DATE SEARCH  
Notes  
The date search function does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/
standard 8 mm system.  
If one days recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately  
find the point where the recording date changes.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The date search function may not work correctly.  
91  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o  
PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN  
You can search for the still image recorded on a tape (photo search).  
You can also search for still images one after another and display each image for five  
seconds automatically (photo scan).  
Use the Remote Commander for these operations.  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the  
PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears on the screen. The indicator changes as  
follows:  
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)  
(3) Press . or > to select the photo for playback. Each time you press . or  
> your camcorder searches for the previous or next photo. Your camcorder  
automatically starts playback of the photo.  
PHOTO  
SEARCH  
00  
2
3
SEARCH  
MODE  
PHOTO  
01  
SEARCH  
DCR-TRV250  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
92  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN  
Sca n n in g p h o t o  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the  
PHOTO SCAN indicator appears on the screen.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)  
(3) Press . or >.  
Each photo is played back for about five seconds automatically.  
PHOTO  
00  
SCAN  
2
3
SEARCH  
MODE  
DCR-TRV250  
To st o p sca n n in g  
Press x.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The photo search and photo scan function may not work correctly.  
93  
Ed it in g —  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
You can dub or edit on the VCR connected to your camcorder using your camcorder as  
a player.  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
Press the following buttons to make the indicators disappear so that they will not be  
superimposed on the edited tape:  
DATA CODE on the Remote Commander  
SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander  
DISPLAY  
(1) Insert a tape for recording into the VCR, and insert the recorded tape into your  
camcorder.  
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the input selector to LINE.  
Connect the A/ V connecting cable to the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack. Refer to the  
operating instructions of your VCR.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR/ PLAYER.*  
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.  
(5) Start recording on the VCR.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
Yellow  
White  
IN  
S VIDEO  
A/ V connecting cable  
(supplied)  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VCR  
AUDIO/ A/V OUT  
VIDEO  
Red  
S VIDEO S VIDEO OUT  
: Signal flow  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
94  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
Yellow  
IN  
CCD-TRV418  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A/V OUT  
S VIDEO OUT  
VCR  
A/ V connecting cable  
(supplied)  
Black  
: Signal flow  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
To p re ve n t d e t e rio ra t io n o f p ict u re s w h e n d u b b in g  
Set EDIT to ON in the menu settings before dubbing. (The default setting is OFF.)  
(p. 214)  
You can edit on VCRs that support the follow ing systems:  
8 mm , Hi8  
, Digital8 , VHS  
, S-VHS  
, VHSC  
, S-VHSC  
,
Betamax , ED Betamax  
, mini DV , DV  
, or MICRO MV  
.
If your VCR is a monaural type  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR. When the white plug is  
connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected, the  
right channel audio is output.  
If your VCR is a stereo type  
Connect the audio plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the left (white) input jack of  
your VCR.  
If your VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
VCR.  
95  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le  
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (optional) to DV on your camcorder and to DV IN on  
the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are  
transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing. You cannot dub the screen  
indicators.  
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert  
the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
(2) Set the input selector on the VCR to DV IN if it is available. Refer to the  
operating instructions of your VCR.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.  
(5) Start recording on the VCR.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
VCR  
DV  
DV  
DV IN  
i.LINK cable  
(optional)  
is marked on  
this side.  
: Signal flow  
96  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
Note on tapes that are recorded in the Hi8  
/standard 8 mm system  
The picture may fluctuate. This is not a malfunction. Digital signals are output as image  
signals from the DV jack during playback.  
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable  
See page 244 for more information about i.LINK.  
Pictures processed by the follow ing functions cannot be output through the DV  
jack:  
Digital effect  
Tape PB ZOOM  
Picture effect  
If you record paused playback picture w ith the DV jack  
The recorded picture becomes rough. Also, when you play back the picture using other  
video equipment, the picture may jitter.  
When you connect using an i.LINK cable  
You cannot dub the titles and display indicators.  
97  
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily Ea sy Du b b in g  
VCR operation for dubbing can be controlled easily by using your camcorder  
when the VCR is connected.  
You can select one of eight preset titles and two custom titles stored in your camcorder  
as instructed in Making your own titles(p. 77). Select the desired color, size, and  
background color of titles.  
Usin g t h e Ea sy Du b b in g  
Step 1 Connecting the VCR  
Step 2 Setting the VCR to operate with your camcorder (p. 99 to 102)  
Step 3 Selecting the title (p. 103)  
Step 4 Selecting the dubbing mode (p. 104)  
Step 5 Performing Easy Dubbing (p. 105)  
If you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip Step 2 (p. 99 to 102).  
If you do not need to put in a title, you can skip Step 3 (p. 103).  
St e p 1: Co n n e ct in g t h e VCR  
Connect the devices as illustrated in page 95.  
You can edit on VCRs that support the follow ing systems:  
8 mm , Hi8  
, Digital8 , VHS  
, S-VHS  
, VHSC  
, S-VHSC  
,
Betamax , ED Betamax  
, mini DV , DV  
, or MICRO MV  
.
If your VCR has an S video jack  
Picture can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
VCR.  
98  
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily – Ea sy Du b b in g  
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR t o o p e ra t e w it h yo u r ca m co rd e r  
Signals to control the VCR are sent from your camcorders infrared rays emitter to the  
VCR’s remote sensor.  
When you connect using the A/ V connecting cable, follow the procedure below, steps  
(1) to (4), to send the control signal correctly.  
(1) Se t t in g t h e m o d e s t o ca n ce l re co rd in g p a u se o n t h e VCR  
1 Set the POWER switch to PLAYER on your camcorder.  
2 Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to LINE.  
When you connect a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VTR/  
VCR.  
3 Press EASY DUB to display the menu.  
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SETUP, then press the dial.  
5 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSE MODE, then press the  
dial.  
6 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the mode to cancel recording  
pause on the VCR, then press the dial.  
1
4
5
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
S E T U P  
0:00:00  
I
R
SETUP  
PAUSE MODE  
TEST  
R E T U R N  
3
I
R
NORMAL  
[
]
:
E A S Y D UB  
END  
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
S E T U P  
0:00:00  
I
R
SETUP  
PAUSE MODE PAUSE  
I
R
TEST  
REC  
PB  
R E T U R N  
NORMAL  
[
]
:
E A S Y D UB  
END  
CCD-TRV418  
3
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
S T A R T  
L E S E L  
M O D E S E L  
SETUP  
0:00:00  
T
I
T
EASY DUB  
NORMAL  
[
]
:
E A S Y D UB  
END  
99  
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily Ea sy Du b b in g  
Buttons for canceling recording pause on the VCR  
The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause:  
Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X.  
Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z.  
Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is N.  
(2) Se t t in g t h e IR SETUP co d e  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP, then press the dial.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the IR SETUP code of your VCR,  
then press the dial.  
Check the code in About the IR SETUP code(p. 101).  
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
S E T U P  
0:00:00  
1
I
R
SETUP  
PAUSE MODE  
TEST  
R E T U R N  
3
I
R
NORMAL  
[
] :  
E A S Y D U B E N D  
CCD-TRV418  
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
S E T U P  
0:00:00  
3
I
R
SETUP  
PAUSE MODE  
TEST  
R E T U R N  
I
R
NORMAL  
[
] :  
E A S Y D U B E N D  
100  
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily Ea sy Du b b in g  
About the IR SETUP code  
The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the  
correct code depending on your VCR. The default setting is Code number 3.  
Brand  
IR SETUP code  
Brand  
IR SETUP code  
* TV/ VCR component  
Note on IR SETUP code  
Easy Dubbing is not possible if the VCR does not support IR SETUP codes.  
101  
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily Ea sy Du b b in g  
(3) Se t t in g yo u r ca m co rd e r a n d t h e VCR t o fa ce e a ch o t h e r  
Locate the infrared rays emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the remote  
sensor of the VCR.  
Set the devices about 30 cm (12 in.) apart, and remove any obstacles between the  
devices.  
Infrared rays emitter  
VCR  
Remote sensor  
A/ V connecting  
cable (supplied)  
CCD-TRV418  
(4) Co n firm in g t h e VCR o p e ra t io n  
1 Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set the VCR to recording pause.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial.  
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.  
When recording is finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.  
2
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
S E T U P  
0:00:00  
I
R
SETUP  
PAUSE MODE  
TEST  
R E T U R N  
I
R
READY  
NORMAL  
[
] :  
E A S Y D U B E N D  
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
S E T U P  
0:00:00  
ENGAGE  
REC PAUSE  
I
R
SETUP  
PAUSE MODE  
TEST  
R E T U R N  
CCD-TRV418  
I
R
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
NORMAL  
[
] :  
E A S Y D U B E N D  
Wh e n t h e VCR d o e s n o t o p e ra t e co rre ct ly  
After checking the code in About the IR SETUP code,set IR SETUP or  
PAUSE MODE again.  
Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (12 in.) away from the VCR.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
102  
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily Ea sy Du b b in g  
St e p 3: Se le ct in g t h e t it le  
You can select title, color, size, and background color.  
CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 are custom titles stored in your camcorder as instructed in  
Making your own titles(p. 77).  
HELLO!  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLE SEL, then press the dial.  
(2) Select the desired title in the menu settings, then press the dial.  
The title flashes.  
(3) Change the color, size, or background color.  
If you do not need to change them, go to Step 4 (p. 104).  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the color, size, or background  
color, then press the dial. The item appears.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial.  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired.  
(4) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting.  
CCD-TRV418  
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
S T A R T  
0:00:00  
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
L E S E L  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
0:00:00  
T
I
T
1
2
3
T
I
T
L E S E L  
O F F  
M O D E S E L  
S E T U P  
O F F  
HE L L O  
HA P P Y  
!
B
I
R T HDA Y  
DA Y S  
CONGRA T U L A T ONS  
OUR E E T B A B Y  
HA P P Y HO L  
I
I
!
S
W
NORMAL  
0:00:00  
[
] :  
E A S Y D U B E N D  
[
] :  
E A S Y D U B E N D  
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
L E S E L  
E A S Y DU B B  
T T L E  
I
NG  
I
T
I
T
O F F  
HE L L O  
HA P P Y  
!
B
I
RT HDA Y  
HELLO!  
HA P P Y HOL  
CONGRA T UL A T  
OUR E E T B A B Y  
I
DA Y S  
I
ONS  
!
S
W
[
] :  
E A S Y D U B E N D  
[
] :  
E A S Y D U B E N D  
0:00:00  
E A S Y DU B B  
Z E  
I
NG  
E A S Y DU B B  
T T L E  
I
NG  
I
S
I
SMA L L  
E A S Y DU B B  
Z E  
I
NG  
0:00:00  
S
I
L ARGE  
HELLO!  
HELLO!  
[
] :  
E A S Y D U B E N D  
103  
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily Ea sy Du b b in g  
Note  
You can put a title only into the tape of the VCR.  
Title setting  
The title color changes as follows:  
WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE  
The title size changes as follows:  
SMALL y LARGE  
The background color changes as follows:  
FADE y WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y  
BLUE y BLACK  
St e p 4: Se le ct in g t h e d u b b in g m o d e  
You can choose either normal recording (NORMAL) or interval recording (PREVIEW).  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MODE SEL, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select NORMAL or PREVIEW, then press  
the dial.  
NORMAL: You can record into the VCR normally.  
PREVIEW: You can make a time-lapse dubbing by setting the VCR to  
automatically repeat five secondsrecording and 25 seconds’  
standby.  
5 s  
5 s  
[a ]  
[b]  
[c]  
[a ]: Recording time (VCR)  
[b ]: Waiting time (VCR)  
[c]: Playback time (camcorder)  
25 s  
30 s  
25 s  
30 s  
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
START  
TITLE SEL  
MODE SEL  
SET UP  
0:00:00  
1
NORMAL  
NORMAL  
[
] :  
E A S Y D U B E N D  
CCD-TRV418  
E A S Y D U B B I N G  
START  
0:00:00  
TITLE SEL  
MODE SEL  
SET UP  
NORMAL  
PREVIEW  
NORMAL  
[
] :  
E A S Y D U B E N D  
104  
Du b b in g a t a p e e a sily – Ea sy Du b b in g  
St e p 5: Pe rfo rm in g Ea sy Du b b in g  
Make sure that your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to  
recording pause.  
When you use a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VTR/ VCR. Set the  
POWER switch of your camcorder to PLAYER.  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
When dubbing ends, your camcorder and VCR stop automatically.  
Then the display returns to the Easy Dubbing initial screen.  
To stop dubbing during editing  
Press x on your camcorder.  
To quit Easy Dubbing  
Press EASY DUB.  
Note  
If you set the background color to FADE in Step 3 (p. 103), the picture may not appear  
properly depending on the connected VCR.  
You cannot record on the VCR w hen:  
– The tape has run out.  
– The write-protect tab is set to lock.  
– The IR SETUP code is not correct.  
– The button used to cancel recording pause is not correct.  
NOT READY appears on the screen w hen  
START is not carried out.  
105  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s  
Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a tape without operating  
the VCR.  
Scenes can be selected by frame. You can set up to 20 programs.  
Your camcorder can dub on a Memory Stick.See page 156 for more information.  
Unwanted scene  
Unwanted scene  
Switch the order  
Be fo re o p e ra t io n  
Step 1 Connecting the VCR (p. 107)  
Step 2 Setting the VCR for operation  
with the A/ V connecting cable (p. 107 to 110)  
with the i.LINK cable (p. 111 to 112)  
Step 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 113)  
When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip Step 2 (p. 107 to 112) and  
Step 3 (p. 113 to 114).  
Usin g t h is fu n ct io n  
Operation 1 Making a program (p. 115)  
Operation 2 Performing the program (Dubbing a tape) (p. 118)  
Note  
Digital program editing does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8  
standard 8 mm system.  
/
106  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
St e p 1: Co n n e ct in g t h e VCR  
You can connect either an A/ V connecting cable or an i.LINK cable.  
When you use the A/ V connecting cable, connect the devices as illustrated in page 94.  
When you use the i.LINK cable, connect the devices as illustrated on page 96.  
If you connect using the i.LINK cable  
With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital  
format for high-quality editing.  
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR fo r o p e ra t io n w it h t h e A/V co n n e ct in g  
ca b le  
To edit using the VCR, set up your camcorder to send the control signal by infrared rays  
to the remote sensor on the VCR.  
When you connect using the A/ V connecting cable, follow the procedure below, steps  
(1) to (4), to send the control signal correctly.  
(1) Se t t h e IR SETUP co d e  
1 Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
2 Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to  
LINE.  
When you connect a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/  
VTR.  
3 Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
5
, then press the dial.  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE in VIDEO EDIT, then press  
the dial.  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.  
6 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.  
7 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.  
8 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR, then press the dial.  
9 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP, then press the dial.  
0 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP code number of your  
VCR, then press the dial.  
Check the code in About the IR SETUP code(p. 101).  
107  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
MENU  
5
6
7
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 55 06  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 55 06  
1
IN  
UNDO  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
1
IR  
TAPE  
MEMORY  
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
:
:
:
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT READY  
RETURN  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 55 06  
1
IN  
IR  
i. LINK  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
EDIT SET  
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
10  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
3
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
108  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
(2) Se t t in g t h e m o d e s t o ca n ce l t h e re co rd in g p a u se o n t h e VCR  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSEMODE, then press the dial.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the mode to cancel recording  
pause on the VCR, then press the dial.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE PAUSE  
PAUSEMODE PAUSE  
IR TEST  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
REC  
PB  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
MENU END  
Buttons to cancel recording pause on the VCR  
The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause:  
Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X.  
Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z.  
Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is N.  
(3) Se t t in g yo u r ca m co rd e r a n d t h e VCR t o fa ce e a ch o t h e r  
Locate the infrared rays emitter of your camcorder and face it toward the remote  
sensor of the VCR.  
Set the devices about 30 cm (12 in.) apart, and remove any obstacles between the  
devices.  
Infrared rays emitter  
VCR  
Remote sensor  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
109  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
(4) Co n firm in g VCR o p e ra t io n  
1 Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set the VCR to recording pause.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial.  
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.  
When recording is finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
2
3
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
ENGAGE  
REC PAUSE  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
COMPLETE  
RETURN  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
MENU END  
Wh e n t h e VCR d o e s n o t o p e ra t e co rre ct ly  
After checking the code in About the IR SETUP code,set IR SETUP or  
PAUSEMODE again.  
Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (12 in.) away from the VCR.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
110  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR fo r o p e ra t io n w it h t h e i.LINK ca b le  
When you connect using the i.LINK cable (optional), follow the procedure below.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to DV  
input. When you connect a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch  
to VCR/ VTR.  
(3) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
, then press the dial.  
(5)  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE in VIDEO EDIT, then press the  
dial.  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.  
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.  
(8) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial.  
111  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
MENU  
6
7
5
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 55 06  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
1
IN  
UNDO  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
1
IR  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
TAPE  
MEMORY  
:
0
:
:
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
:
:
:
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT READY  
RETURN  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 55 06  
1
IN  
IR  
i. LINK  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
EDIT SET  
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
8
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
i. LINK  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
Note  
When editing digital video, the operation signals cannot be sent with LANC.  
When you connect using an i.LINK cable  
You cannot dub the titles and display indicators.  
You may not be able to operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the  
VCR. Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder.  
112  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
St e p 3: Ad ju st in g t h e syn ch ro n iza t io n o f t h e VCR  
You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR. Have a pen and  
paper ready for notes. Before operation, eject the cassette from your camcorder if  
inserted.  
(1) Insert a tape for recording into the VCR, then set the VCR to recording pause.  
When you select i.LINK in CONTROL, you do not need to set the VCR to  
recording pause.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
IN and OUT are recorded on an image five times each to calculate the  
numerical values for adjusting the synchronization.  
The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the screen.  
When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.  
(4) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback.  
Take a note of the first numerical value of each IN and the last numerical  
value of each OUT.  
(5) Calculate the average of all the first numerical values of each IN, and the  
average of all the last numerical values of each OUT.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CUT-IN,then press the dial.  
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of IN,  
then press the dial.  
The calculated start position for recording is set.  
(8) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CUT-OUT,then press the dial.  
(9) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the average numerical value of OUT,  
then press the dial.  
The calculated stop position for recording is set.  
(10)Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
RETURN, then press the dial.  
113  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
2
6
3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
[ ] :  
MENU END  
0 08 55 06  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
RETURN  
EXECUTING  
COMPLETE  
EXECUTE  
ENGAGE  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE 60  
IR TEST  
No. 5  
IN  
PAUSEMODE REC PAUSE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
RETURN  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
8
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
0
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
0
RETURN  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
MENU END  
Notes  
When you complete step (3), the image used to adjust synchronization is recorded for  
about 50 seconds.  
If you start recording from the very beginning of the tape, the first few seconds of the  
tape may not record properly. Be sure to allow about 10 secondslead before starting  
recording.  
When you connect with the i.LINK cable, you may not be able to operate the dubbing  
function correctly depending on the VCR.  
Keep the i.LINK connection, and set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings.  
Video and audio signals are transmitted in digital format.  
114  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
Op e ra t io n 1: Ma kin g a p ro g ra m  
(1) Insert a tape for playback into your camcorder, and insert a tape for recording  
into the VCR.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
, then press the dial.  
(4)  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE in VIDEO EDIT, then press the  
dial.  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.  
(5) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
control buttons, then pause playback.  
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MARK, then press the dial.  
The IN point of the first program is set, and the upper part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(7) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video control  
buttons, then pause playback.  
(8) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the lower part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(9) Repeat steps (5) to (8) to set other programs.  
When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.  
You can set up to 20 programs.  
115  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
REW  
PLAY  
FF  
5,7  
STOP  
PAUSE  
MENU  
4
9
6
8
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 55 06  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 55 06  
OUT  
1
IN  
1
UNDO  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
1
TAPE  
MEMORY  
:
0
:
:
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
SCENE  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
:
:
:
:
:
:
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT READY  
RETURN  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 09 07 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 08 55 06  
1
IN  
2
IN  
UNDO  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
EDIT SET  
:
:
:
:
1
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
TOTAL 0 00 12 00  
SCENE  
0
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0 10 01 23  
4
IN  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
:
3
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 47 12  
SCENE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
116  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t  
Erase OUT first and then IN of the last program.  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.  
To cancel erasing  
Select RETURN in step (2).  
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s  
(1)  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE in VIDEO EDIT, then press the  
dial.  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.  
(2) Select ERASE ALL in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to  
select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.  
To cancel erasing all programs  
Select RETURN in step (2).  
To cancel the program you have set  
Press MENU.  
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.  
Notes  
Digital program editing does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/
standard 8 mm system.  
You cannot dub the title or display indicators. However, you can dub the title which  
has already been recorded on a tape.  
You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing on a tape.  
You cannot set IN or OUT to the follow ing portions of the tape:  
A portion recorded in Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm system  
A blank portion of the tape  
The total time may not be displayed correctly in the follow ing cases:  
The tape is recorded in the Hi8 / standard 8 mm system.  
There is a blank portion between IN and OUT on the tape.  
117  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
Op e ra t io n 2: Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g a t a p e )  
Make sure that your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to  
recording pause.  
When you use an i.LINK cable, setting the VCR to recording pause is not necessary.  
When you use a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/ VTR.  
(1)  
Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to  
select TAPE, then press the dial.  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT, then press the dial.  
(2) Select START in the menu settings. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
Your camcorder searches for the beginning of the first program, then starts  
dubbing.  
The program mark flashes.  
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDITING indicator  
appears during edit on the screen.  
The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing ends.  
When dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop.  
Then the display returns to the VIDEO EDIT initial screen.  
To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g  
Press x on your camcorder.  
To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g  
Press MENU.  
You cannot record on the VCR w hen:  
The cassette has run out of tape.  
The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to lock.  
The IR SETUP code is not correct (when IR is selected).  
The button to cancel recording pause is not correct (when IR is selected).  
NOT READY appears on the screen w hen:  
The program to operate Digital program editing has not been made.  
i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable is not connected.  
The power of the connected VCR is not turned on (when i.LINK is selected).  
118  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
You can record a tape from another VCR or TV program from TV that has video/ audio  
outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder.  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
(1) Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder. If you want to record a tape  
from the VCR, insert a recorded tape into the VCR.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,  
then immediately press X on your camcorder.  
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record a tape from a VCR. Select  
a TV program if you record from TV.  
The picture from the TV or VCR appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording  
from.  
3
PAUSE  
REC  
TV  
Yellow  
White  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A/ V connecting cable  
(supplied)  
VCR  
Red  
: Signal flow  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
119  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
Notes  
To enable smooth transition, we recommend that you do not mix pictures recorded in  
the Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm with the Digital8 system on a tape.  
If you do fast-forward or slow-playback on the other equipment, the image being  
recorded may fluctuate. When recording from other equipment, be sure to play back  
the original tape at normal speed.  
If your VCR or TV is a monaural type  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video output jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white  
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,  
the right channel audio is output.  
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
TV or VCR.  
120  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le  
You can record a tape from a VCR that has DV outputs. Use your camcorder as a  
recorder.  
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (optional) to DV of your camcorder and to DV OUT  
of the DV products. With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are  
transmitted in digital form for high-quality editing.  
(1) Insert a blank tape for recording into your camcorder, and insert the recorded  
tape into the VCR.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,  
then immediately press X on your camcorder.  
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback.  
The picture to be recorded appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording  
from.  
3
PAUSE  
REC  
VCR  
DV  
DV  
is marked on  
this side.  
DV OUT  
i.LINK cable  
(optional)  
: Signal flow  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable.  
When you dub a picture in digital form  
The color of the display may be uneven. However, this does not affect the dubbed  
picture.  
121  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
If you record a paused playback picture w ith the DV jack  
The recorded picture becomes rough. When you play back the picture using your  
camcorder, the picture may jitter.  
Before recording  
Make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on the screen of your camcorder by  
pressing DISPLAY. The DV IN indicator may appear on both equipment.  
122  
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR  
In se rt Ed it in g  
You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape by  
specifying the insert start and end points.  
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Connections are the same as on page 119 and 121. Insert a cassette containing the  
desired scene into the VCR.  
[a ]  
[A]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[B]  
[C]  
[A]: A tape that contains the scene to be superimposed (VCR)  
[B]: A tape before editing (your camcorder)  
[C]: A tape after editing (your camcorder)  
123  
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR In se rt Ed it in g  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(2) On the connected VCR, locate just before the insert start point [a ], then press X  
to set the VCR to the playback pause mode.  
(3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c] by pressing m or M.  
Then press X to set your camcorder to the playback pause mode.  
(4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET  
MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in  
memory. The tape counter shows 0:00:00.”  
(5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b ] by pressing m. Press  
z REC and the button on its right simultaneously, then immediately press X  
to set your camcorder to the recording pause mode.  
(6) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press X on your camcorder  
to start inserting the new scene.  
Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the counter. Your  
camcorder automatically stops. The end point [c] of the insert stored in  
memory is canceled.  
5
PAUSE  
REC  
0:00:00  
4
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
To ch a n g e t h e in se rt e n d p o in t  
Press ZERO SET MEMORY again after step (5) to make the ZERO SET MEMORY  
indicator disappear and begin from step (3).  
124  
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR In se rt Ed it in g  
Notes  
The zero set memory function does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/
standard 8 mm system.  
Pictures and sound recorded on the section between the insert start and end points  
will be erased when you insert the new scene.  
If you use the Remote Commander when dubbing a tape, the VCR may operate  
accidentally. Should this happen, change the commander mode of the VCR to one  
other than VTR2, or cover the sensor of the VCR with black paper.  
If you insert scenes on the tape recorded on another camcorder  
The pictures and sound may be distorted. We recommend that you insert scenes on a  
tape recorded on your camcorder.  
When the inserted picture is played back  
Pictures and sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted section. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Pictures and sound at the start point and the end point may be distorted in the LP  
mode.  
To insert a scene w ithout setting the insert end point  
Skip step (3) and (4). Press x when you want to stop inserting.  
125  
— “ Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s – Re co rd in g —  
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
You can record and play back images on a “Memory Stick.” You can easily play back,  
record or delete images. You can exchange image data with other equipment such as  
your computer, etc., using the USB cable for a “Memory Stick” (p. 182).  
See page 240 for details of “Memory Stick.”  
On file fo rm a t (DCF co m p lia n t )  
Still image: Exif * Ver.2.2 JPEG compliant, DPOF compatible  
Moving picture: MPEG1 compliant (monaural)  
* Exif:Exif is a file format for still images, established by the Japan Electronics and  
Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA). Files in this format can  
have additional information such as your camcorder's setting information at the  
time of recording.  
Typical image data file name  
Still image  
101 (up to 999)-0001: This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
Dsc00001.jpg:  
This file name appears on the display of your computer.  
Moving picture  
MOV00001:  
Mov00001.mpg:  
This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
This file name appears on the display of your computer.  
Me m o ry St ick” fo rm a t t e d o n co m p u t e r  
A “Memory Stick” formatted on Windows OS or Macintosh OS is not guaranteed to be  
compatible with your camcorder.  
No t e s o n im a g e d a t a co m p a t ib ilit y  
• Image data files recorded on a “Memory Stick” by your camcorder conform with the  
Design Rule for Camera File System universal standard established by the JEITA  
(Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association). You cannot  
play back on your camcorder images recorded on other equipment (DCR-TRV890E/  
TRV900/ TRV900E or DSC-D700/ D770) that does not conform with this universal  
standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)  
• If you cannot use the “Memory Stick” that is used with other equipment, format it  
with your camcorder (p. 218). However, formatting erases all information on the  
“Memory Stick.”  
• You may not be able to play back the images recorded using your camcorder, on other  
playback equipment.  
• You may not be able to play back following images with your camcorder:  
– image data modified on a computer  
– image data shot with other equipment  
126  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
In se rt in g a Me m o ry St ick”  
Insert a Memory Stickin the Memory Stickslot as far as it can go with the b mark  
facing the LCD panel as illustrated.  
Access lamp  
b mark  
Eje ct in g t h e Me m o ry St ick”  
Press the Memory Stickonce lightly.  
When the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or knock your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data  
from the Memory Stickor recording the data on the Memory Stick.Do not turn the  
power off, eject the Memory Stickor remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data  
may become damaged.  
If “  
MEMORY STICK ERRORis displayed  
Reinsert Memory Sticka few times. The Memory Stickmay be damaged if the  
indicator is still displayed. If this occurs, use another Memory Stick.”  
If the w rite-protect tab on a Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
-appears and functions using the Memory Stickdo not work.  
127  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Se le ct in g t h e st ill im a g e q u a lit y m o d e  
You can select the image quality mode in still image recording. The default setting is  
FINE.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
1
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select STILL SET in  
, then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY, then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality, then press  
the dial.  
1
MEM SET  
1
STILL SET  
QUALITY  
FLD/FRAME  
RETURN  
3
4
5
FINE  
1
2
REMAIN  
50  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MEM SET  
1
STILL SET  
QUALITY  
FINE  
FLD/FRAME STANDARD  
RETURN  
1
2
REMAIN  
50  
[
] :  
MENU END  
2
MEM SET  
1
STILL SET  
QUALITY  
STANDARD  
MENU  
FLD/FRAME  
RETURN  
1
2
REMAIN  
120  
[
] :  
MENU END  
128  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Im a g e q u a lit y se t t in g s  
Setting  
Meaning  
FINE (FINE)  
Use this mode when you want to record high quality  
images. The number of still images that can be  
recorded on a Memory Stickbecomes less than the  
number when recorded in STANDARD. Fine images  
are compressed to about 1/ 4.  
STANDARD (STD)  
This is the standard image quality. Standard images  
are compressed to about 1/ 10.  
Note  
In some cases, changing the image quality mode may not affect the image quality,  
depending on the types of images you are shooting.  
Differences in image quality mode  
Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored into memory. The  
memory capacity allocated to each image varies depending on the selected image  
quality mode. Details are shown in the table below.  
Image quality mode  
FINE  
Memory capacity  
About 150 KB  
About 60 KB  
STANDARD  
Image quality mode indicator  
The image quality mode indicator is not displayed during playback.  
When you select image quality  
The number of images you can shoot in the currently selected image quality appears on  
the screen.  
129  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Se le ct in g t h e m o vin g p ict u re size  
You can select either of two image sizes 320 × 240 or 160 × 112.  
(The default setting is 320 × 240.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR or MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MOVIE SET in  
1
, then press the  
dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE, then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image size, then press the  
dial.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
320  
160  
1
4
5
MEM S ET  
MOV  
I MAGE S  
REMA  
RE T URN  
1
320  
I
E
S E T  
I
I
Z E 320 240  
N
160 112  
1
2
REMA  
I
N
40sec  
[
]
:
MENU  
END  
MEM S E T  
MOV  
1
I
E
S E T  
I MAGE S  
REMA  
I
I
Z E 160 112  
N
1
RE T URN  
2
REMA  
I
N
2min  
MENU  
[
]
:
MENU  
END  
The still image size  
The still image size is 640 × 480 only.  
130  
Usin g a “ Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Mo vin g p ict u re size se t t in g s  
Setting  
Meaning  
Indicator  
320 × 240  
Records 320 × 240 moving pictures.  
320  
160 × 112  
Records 160 × 112 moving pictures.  
160  
Ap p ro xim a t e n u m b e r o f st ill im a g e s yo u ca n re co rd o n a  
Me m o ry St ick”  
The number of images you can record varies depending on which image quality you  
select and the complexity of the subject.  
Type of the “Memory Stick”  
Image quality  
8MB  
(supplied)*  
(optional)*  
50 images  
120 images  
16MB  
(optional)  
32MB  
(optional)  
64MB  
(optional)  
128MB  
(optional)  
1)  
2)  
FINE  
96 images  
190 images  
485 images  
390 images  
980 images  
780 images  
STANDARD  
240 images  
1970 images  
Ap p ro xim a t e t im e o f m o vin g p ict u re s yo u ca n re co rd o n a  
Me m o ry St ick”  
The time of moving pictures you can record varies depending on which image size you  
select and the complexity of the subject.  
Type of the “Memory Stick”  
Image size  
8MB  
(supplied)*  
(optional)*  
16MB  
(optional)  
32MB  
(optional)  
64MB  
(optional)  
128MB  
(optional)  
1)  
2)  
1 min.  
20 sec.  
2 min.  
40 sec.  
5 min.  
20 sec.  
10 min.  
40 sec.  
21 min.  
20 sec.  
320 × 240  
5 min.  
20 sec.  
10 min.  
40 sec.  
21 min.  
20 sec.  
42 min.  
40 sec.  
85 min.  
20 sec.  
160 × 112  
The tables above show approximate number of still images and times of moving  
pictures you can record on a “Memory Stick” formatted on your camcorder.  
When available recording time is not left on the “Memory Stick”  
FULL” appears.  
1)  
*
2)  
*
131  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry  
St ick” – Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
You can record still images on a Memory Stick.”  
You can select the FIELD or FRAME mode in still image recording. Your camcorder  
compensates for camera-shake when recording moving subjects in the FIELD mode.  
Your camcorder records in high quality in the FRAME mode. Select the FIELD or  
FRAME in the menu settings (p. 217). (The default setting is FIELD.)  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the desired still image appears. The green  
z mark stops flashing, then lights up. The brightness of the image and focus  
are adjusted and fixed while your camcorder targets at the middle of the  
image. Recording does not start yet.  
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The shutter sounds, and the image becomes still.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
The image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the  
Memory Stick.”  
2
FINE  
26  
101  
3
FINE  
1
101  
Yo u ca n re co rd st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ickin CAMERA  
m o d e .  
For details, see page 53.  
132  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Notes  
When recording fast-moving subjects in the FRAME mode, the recorded image  
appears blurry.  
When recording in the FRAME mode, your camcorder may not correct camera-  
shake. We recommend that you shoot objects with a tripod.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
The following functions do not work:  
Wide mode  
Fader  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
Picture effect  
Digital effect  
Titles  
While you are recording a still image  
You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
When you press PHOTO lightly in step (2)  
The image momentarily flickers. This is not a malfunction.  
Data code  
The data code (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed while  
recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto the Memory Stick.”  
To display the data code, press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander during  
playback.  
133  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g st ill im a g e re co rd in g  
Image quality  
1300  
FINE  
Approximate number of still images that can be  
recorded on the Memory Stick.”  
–––  
–––  
101  
Current recording folder  
Notes  
The current recording folder indicator shows the folder in which images are recorded.  
The number of images can be recorded on a Memory Stickis displayable up to 9999.  
Even if the Memory Stickhas a capacity of 10 000 images or more, it is still  
displayed as >9999.  
The indication of the number of recordable still images  
Depending on the image quality setting and the complexity of the subject, the indication  
of the remaining number of recordable still images may not change even after you  
record an image.  
In CAMERA or VCR mode  
The current recording folder indicator is displayed for about five seconds in the  
following cases:  
When a Memory Stickis inserted  
When the POWER switch is set to another position  
The current recording folder indicator is displayed while your camcorder is capturing  
an image or recording a still image on a Memory Stick.”  
The current recording folder indicator takes priority over the 16 BIT indicator (audio  
mode) when it is displayed.  
134  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Se lf-t im e r m e m o ry p h o t o re co rd in g  
You can record still images on Memory Sticks with the self-timer. You can also use  
the Remote Commander for this operation.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SELFTIMER in  
, then press the  
dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(5) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(6) Press PHOTO deeper.  
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of  
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.  
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
CAMERA SET  
SELFTIMER  
OFF  
ON  
4
D
ZOOM  
STEADYSHOT  
N. S. LIGHT  
RETURN  
1
2
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r  
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings while your camcorder is in the standby  
mode. You cannot cancel self-timer with the Remote Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:  
Self-timer recording is finished.  
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
135  
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill  
im a g e s  
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape in the Digital8  
system, and record it as a still image on a Memory Stick.”  
Your camcorder can also capture moving picture data through the input connector and  
record it as a still image on a Memory Stick.”  
Before operation  
Insert a tape recorded in the Digital8 system into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press N. Moving pictures recorded on the tape are played back.  
(3) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until the picture from the tape freezes.  
The CAPTURE indicator appears on the screen. Recording does not start yet.  
To change the still image, release PHOTO and select a still image again.  
(4) Press PHOTO deeper. Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator  
disappears. The image displayed on the screen when you pressed PHOTO  
deeper will be recorded on the Memory Stick.Playback of the tape is  
resumed.  
FINE  
50  
CAPTURE  
2
3
4
PLAY  
101  
FINE  
101  
136  
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s  
When the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or knock the unit. Also do not turn the power off, eject the Memory  
Stickor remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data may become damaged.  
If the  
indicator appears on the screen  
The inserted Memory Stickis incompatible with your camcorder because its format  
does not conform with your camcorder. Check the format of the Memory Stick.”  
If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback mode  
Your camcorder stops momentarily.  
Sound recorded on a tape  
You cannot record audio from a tape.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
Titles superimposed on tapes  
You cannot record titles on the Memory Stick.However, you can record titles which  
have already been recorded on tapes.  
Data code  
The data code (date/ time) when it is recorded on the Memory Stickfrom a tape is  
recorded.  
The data code (various settings) is not recorded.  
The data codes recorded on a tape are not recorded.  
While recording images from a tape as still images  
The image is recorded in the FRAME mode automatically even if you select FIELD in  
the menu settings.  
Recording folder  
You cannot change the recording folder.  
The recording folder you selected when the POWER switch was set to MEMORY is  
used (p. 162).  
137  
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s  
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.) (p. 222)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.  
The picture from TV or VCR appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
(3) Follow steps (3) and (4) on page 136.  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
TV  
Yellow  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
VCR  
: Signal flow  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video output jack on the  
VCR or the TV.  
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
TV or VCR.  
138  
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le  
VCR  
DV  
DV OUT  
DV  
i.LINK cable  
(optional)  
is marked on  
this side.  
: Signal flow  
Note  
In the following instances, “  
REC ERRORis displayed and recording is not possible.  
Record distortion-free images:  
When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has  
been repeatedly used for dubbing.  
Between scenes or in the various playback modes on the tape recorded in Hi8  
standard 8 mm system.  
/
When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception  
when a TV tuner unit is in use.  
139  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e  
Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on the Memory Stickon the  
moving picture you are recording. You can record the superimposed images on a tape  
or a Memory Stickas still images.  
M. CHROM (memory chroma key)  
You can swap only the blue area of a still image, such as an illustration or a frame, with  
a moving picture.  
M. LUMI (memory luminance key)  
You can swap a brighter area of a still image, such as a handwritten illustration or a  
title, with a moving picture. Recording a title on the Memory Stickbefore a trip or  
event is recommended.  
C. CHROM (camera chroma key)  
You can superimpose a moving picture on a still image such as an image that can be  
used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. Only the blue area of  
the moving image will be swapped with the still image.  
M. OVERLAP * (memory overlap)  
You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image recorded on the Memory  
Stickas the overlap function.  
Still image  
Moving picture  
M. CHROM  
Blue  
Still image  
Moving picture  
M. LUMI  
Still image  
Still image  
Moving picture  
C. CHROM  
Blue  
Moving picture  
M. OVERLAP *  
* The superimposed image using M. OVERLAP can be recorded on tapes only.  
140  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a t a p e  
Before operation  
Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickcontaining still images into your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) In the standby mode, press MEMORY MIX.  
The first recorded image appears in the bottom-right corner of the screen as a  
thumbnail image. The last image that is used in MEMORY MIX will be  
displayed next time.  
(3) Press MEMORY+/ to select the still image you want to superimpose.  
: To see the previous image  
+ : To see the next image  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode.  
The mode changes as follows:  
M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM y M. OVERLAP  
(5) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The still image overlaps with the picture on the screen.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.  
M. CHROM The degree of the blue areas in the still image which is to be  
swapped with a moving picture  
M. LUMI  
The brightness of the area in the still image which is to be  
swapped with a moving picture  
C. CHROM The degree of the blue areas in the moving picture which is to  
be swapped with a still image  
M. OVERLAP No adjustment necessary  
The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect becomes.  
(7) Press START/ STOP to start recording.  
START/STOP  
2
MEMORY  
MIX  
M. LUMI  
4
M. CHROM  
101  
1010021  
101  
1010021  
M. LUMI III•••  
5
6
101  
Still image  
1010021  
M. LUMI I•••••  
3
101  
1010021  
141  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o su p e rim p o se  
Do either of the following:  
Press MEMORY+/ before step (7).  
Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step (7), and repeat the procedure from step  
(3).  
To ch a n g e t h e m o d e se t t in g  
Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step (7), and repeat the procedure from step (4).  
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX  
Press MEMORY MIX.  
Notes  
You cannot use MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on a Memory Stick.”  
When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of  
the picture may not be clear.  
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment  
You may not be able to play modified images back with your camcorder.  
When you select M. OVERLAP  
You cannot change the still image or the mode setting.  
During recording  
You cannot change the mode setting.  
Sample images  
The Memory Sticksupplied with your camcorder is already stored with the  
protected 20 images  
:
For M. CHROM:18 images (such as a frame) 101-0001 to 101-0018  
For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) 101-0019 to 101-0020  
The CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder is already stored with 20 images (p. 191):  
For M. CHROM:18 images (such as a frame) DSC 00001 to DSC 00018  
For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) DSC 00019 to DSC 00020  
142  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e “ Me m o ry St ick” o n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” a s a st ill  
im a g e  
Before operation  
Insert a “Memory Stick” containing still images into your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MEMORY MIX.  
The first recorded image appears in the bottom-right corner of the screen as a  
thumbnail image. The last image that is used in MEMORY MIX will be  
displayed next time.  
(3) Press MEMORY+/ – to select the still image you want to superimpose.  
– : To see the previous image  
+ : To see the next image  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode.  
The mode changes as follows:  
M. CHROM y M. LUMI y C. CHROM  
(5) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The still image overlaps with the picture on the screen.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the effect.  
M. CHROM  
M. LUMI  
– The degree of the blue areas in the still image which is to be  
swapped with a moving picture  
– The brightness of the area in the still image which is to be  
swapped with a moving picture  
C. CHROM  
– The degree of the blue areas in the moving picture which is  
to be swapped with a still image  
The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect becomes.  
(7) Press PHOTO deeply to start recording.  
The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on a “Memory Stick.”  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
143  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
PHOTO  
2
MEMORY  
MIX  
M. LUMI  
4
M. CHROM  
101  
101  
1010021  
101  
101  
1010021  
M. LUMI III•••  
5
6
Still image  
101  
101  
1010021  
M. LUMI I•••••  
3
101  
101  
1010021  
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o su p e rim p o se  
Do either of the following:  
Press MEMORY+/ before step (7).  
Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step (7), and repeat the procedure from step  
(3).  
To ch a n g e t h e m o d e se t t in g  
Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial before step (7), and repeat the procedure from step (4).  
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX  
Press MEMORY MIX.  
144  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
Notes  
You cannot use MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on a Memory Stick.”  
When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of  
the picture may not be clear.  
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment  
You may not be able to play modified images back with your camcorder.  
During recording  
You cannot change the mode setting.  
When using MEMORY MIX in MEMORY mode  
The PROGRAM AE function does not work. (The indicator flashes.)  
Recording folder  
You cannot change the recording folder.  
The recording folder you selected when the POWER switch was set to MEMORY is  
used (p. 162).  
Sample images  
The Memory Sticksupplied with your camcorder is already stored with the  
protected 20 images  
:
For M. CHROM:18 images (such as a frame) 101-0001 to 101-0018  
For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) 101-0019 to 101-0020  
The CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder is already stored with 20 images (p. 191):  
For M. CHROM:18 images (such as a frame) DSC 00001 to DSC 00018  
For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) DSC 00019 to DSC 00020  
145  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a Me m o ry  
St ick” – MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
You can record moving pictures with sound on a Memory Stick.”  
The picture and sound are recorded up to the full capacity of a Memory Stick(MPEG  
MOVIE EX).  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The camera recording  
lamp lights up.  
The picture and sound are recorded up to the capacity of a Memory Stick.”  
For more information about recording time, see page 131.  
50min 320REC  
0:00:03  
1min  
2
BBB  
101  
To st o p re co rd in g  
Press START/ STOP.  
Notes  
Sound is recorded in monaural.  
The moving picture files recorded on your camcorder cannot be played back on other  
camcorders without the folder creation function.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY  
The following functions do not work:  
Wide mode  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
Fader  
Picture effect  
Digital effect  
Titles  
146  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
When using an external flash (optional)  
Turn the power of the external flash off when recording moving pictures on a Memory  
Stick.”  
Otherwise, the charging sound for the flash may be recorded.  
Data code  
The data code (date/ time) are not displayed while recording. However, they are  
automatically recorded onto the Memory Stick.”  
To display the data code (date/ time), press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander  
during playback.  
The data code (various settings) cannot be recorded.  
During recording on Memory Stick”  
Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. While ejecting the tape, the sound is  
recorded on the Memory Stick.”  
147  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
Image size  
Recording time  
0:00:05  
1min  
320 REC  
Approximate recording time of moving pictures that  
can be recorded on the “Memory Stick”  
BBB  
This indicator is displayed for five seconds after  
pressing START/ STOP. This indicator is not recorded.  
–––  
–––  
101  
Current recording folder  
Note  
The current recording folder indicator indicates the folder in which images are  
recorded.  
In VCR mode  
• The current recording folder indicator is displayed for about five seconds in the  
following cases:  
– When a “Memory Stick” is inserted  
– When the POWER switch is set to another position  
• The current recording folder indicator is displayed while your camcorder is recording  
a moving picture on a “Memory Stick.”  
148  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
Se lf-t im e r MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
You can record moving pictures on a Memory Stickwith the self-timer. You can also  
use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SELFTIMER in  
, then press the  
dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(5) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(6) Press START/ STOP.  
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of  
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.  
START/STOP  
START/  
STOP  
CAMERA SET  
SELFTIMER  
OFF  
ON  
4
D
ZOOM  
STEADYSHOT  
N. S. LIGHT  
RETURN  
1
2
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n  
Press START/ STOP. To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.  
To ca n ce l se lf-t im e r  
Set SELFTIMER to OFF in the menu settings in the standby mode. You cannot cancel  
self-timer with the Remote Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:  
Self-timer recording is finished.  
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
149  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a  
m o vin g p ict u re  
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on tapes and record it as a  
moving picture on a Memory Stick.Your camcorder can also capture moving picture  
data through the input connector and record it as a moving picture on a Memory  
Stick.”  
The picture and sound are recorded up to the full capacity of a Memory Stick(MPEG  
MOVIE EX).  
Before operation  
Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press N. The picture recorded on the tape is played back.  
And press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
(3) Press START/ STOP on your camcorder.  
Images and sound are recorded up to the remaining capacity of the Memory  
Stick.For more information about recording time, see page 131.  
3
PLAY  
PAUSE  
2
50min  
N
REC  
0:15:42:43  
0:00:03  
1min  
320  
BBB  
101  
To st o p re co rd in g  
Press START/ STOP.  
150  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Notes  
Sound recorded in 48 kHz is converted to 32 kHz sound when recording pictures from  
a tape to a Memory Stick.”  
Sound recorded in stereo is converted to monaural sound when recording from a tape.  
The moving picture files recorded on your camcorder cannot be played back on other  
camcorders without the folder creation function.  
When the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or knock your camcorder. Also, do not set the POWER switch to OFF,  
eject a Memory Stickor remove the battery pack. Otherwise, image data may become  
damaged.  
Titles  
You cannot record titles on the Memory Stick.However, you can record titles which  
have already been recorded on tapes.  
Data code  
The data code (date/ time) when it is recorded on the Memory Stickfrom a tape is  
recorded.  
The data code (various settings) is not recorded.  
The data codes recorded on a tape are not recorded.  
If “  
AUDIO ERRORis displayed  
Sound that cannot be recorded by your camcorder has been recorded on the tape.  
Connect external equipment with the A/ V connecting cable and input images played  
back on it (p. 152).  
The picture may be recorded on the Memory Stickincorrectly if:  
You turn the POWER switch during recording.  
You press any video control buttons during recording.  
Between the scenes recorded in the Digital8 system and in the Hi8  
standard 8 mm system.  
/
A blank portion of the tape.  
The scenes when the input signal is cut off.  
Recording folder  
You cannot change the recording folder.  
The recording folder you selected when the POWER switch was set to MEMORY is  
used (p. 162).  
151  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Re co rd in g a m o vin g p ict u re fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.  
The picture of the other equipment is displayed on the screen or viewfinder.  
(3) Press START/ STOP at the point where you want to start recording from.  
Images and sound are recorded up to the remaining capacity of the Memory  
Stick.For more information about recording time, see page 131.  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
S VIDEO  
TV  
Yellow  
OUT  
White  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VCR  
A/ V connecting  
cable (supplied)  
: Signal flow  
Red  
If your VCR or TV is a monaural type  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video output jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white  
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,  
the right channel audio is output.  
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
TV or VCR.  
152  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le  
VCR  
DV  
DV OUT  
DV  
i.LINK cable  
(optional)  
is marked on  
this side.  
: Signal flow  
Note  
In the following instances, recording is discontinued or “  
REC ERRORis displayed  
and image data is not saved:  
When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has  
been repeatedly used for dubbing.  
Between scenes or in the various playback modes on the tape recorded in Hi8  
standard 8 mm system.  
/
When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception  
when a TV tuner unit is in use.  
When the input signal is cut off.  
During recording on Memory Stick”  
Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. During ejecting of the tape, the  
sound is recorded on the Memory Stick.”  
153  
In t e rva l Ph o t o re co rd in g  
You can take photos successively at regular  
intervals. You can achieve an excellent  
recording for flowering, emergence, etc.,  
with this function.  
[a]  
[a]  
[a]  
Each recording makes each still image file.  
[b]  
[b]  
[a]: Recording  
[b]: Interval time (INTERVAL)  
Before operation  
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select INT.R -STL in 2 , then press the dial  
(p. 218).  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial.  
(5) Set INTERVAL.  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then  
press the dial.  
The time: 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN  
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
RETURN, then press the dial.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(7) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear. The INTERVAL MEM  
STILL indicator flashes.  
(8) Press PHOTO deeper to start interval photo recording. The INTERVAL MEM  
STILL indicator lights up.  
154  
In t e rva l Ph o t o re co rd in g  
8
3,4  
MEM SET 2  
MEM SET 2  
SLIDE SHOW  
INT. R --STL  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
SLIDE SHOW  
INT. R --STL  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
ON  
OFF  
SET  
OFF  
1
2
1
2
RETURN  
RETURN  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
5
MEM SET 2  
INT. R --STL  
INTERVAL  
RETURN  
MEM SET 2  
INT. R --STL  
INTERVAL  
RETURN  
MEM SET 2  
1 MIN  
1 MIN  
5 MIN  
10 MIN  
SLIDE SHOW  
6
ON  
INT. R  
STL  
1
2
1
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
2
1
2
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
7
I NTERVAL  
MEM ST I LL  
MENU  
To ca n ce l in t e rva l p h o t o re co rd in g  
Perform either of the following:  
– Set INT.R -STL to OFF in the menu settings.  
– Set the POWER switch to a position other than MEMORY.  
To p e rfo rm n o rm a l p h o t o re co rd in g d u rin g t h e in t e rva l t im e  
You can perform normal photo recording only once during the interval time. Press  
PHOTO. The INTERVAL MEM STILL indicator flashes, and normal photo recording  
starts. To resume interval photo recording, press PHOTO again. The INTERVAL MEM  
STILL indicator lights up and interval photo recording restarts.  
On interval time  
The actual interval time may not be exactly the same as the selected time.  
155  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s a s a m o vin g  
p ict u re Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a  
Me m o ry St ick)  
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a Memory Stick.”  
The picture and sound are recorded up to the full capacity of a Memory Stick(MPEG  
MOVIE EX).  
Before operation  
Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
Ma kin g t h e p ro g ra m  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press the  
dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MEMORY, then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image size in  
IMAGESIZE, then press the dial.  
(6) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
control buttons, then pause playback.  
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.  
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MARK, then press the dial.  
The IN point of the first program is set, and the upper part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(8) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video control  
buttons, then pause playback.  
(9) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the lower part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(10) Repeat steps (6) to (9) to set other programs.  
When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.  
You can set 20 programs in maximum.  
156  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a Me m o ry St ick)  
REW  
PLAY  
FF  
6,8  
STOP  
PAUSE  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
0:08:55:06  
OUT  
1
2
4
7
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
IMAGESIZE  
TOTAL 0:00:00  
0
2min  
SCENE  
320  
[
] :  
MENU END  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
IMAGESIZE  
0:08:58:06  
IN  
9
TOTAL 0:00:03  
1
2min  
SCENE  
320  
[
] :  
MENU END  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
IMAGESIZE  
0:10:01:23  
IN  
10  
MENU  
TOTAL 0:00:13  
3
2min  
SCENE  
320  
[
] :  
MENU END  
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t  
Erase OUT first and then IN of the last program.  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.  
To cancel erasing  
Select RETURN in step (2).  
157  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a Me m o ry St ick)  
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s  
(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu setting. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to  
select MEMORY, then press the dial.  
(2) Select ERASE ALL. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then  
press the dial.  
All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.  
To cancel erasing all programs  
Select RETURN in step (2).  
To cancel a program you have set  
Press MENU.  
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.  
Notes  
Digital program editing does not work with tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/
standard 8 mm system.  
You cannot dub the title or display indicators. However, you can dub the title which  
has already been recorded on a tape.  
You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing on a Memory Stick.”  
The moving picture files recorded on your camcorder cannot be played back on other  
camcorders without the folder creation function.  
You cannot set IN or OUT to the follow ing portions of the tape:  
A portion recorded in Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm system  
A blank portion of the tape  
The total time may not be displayed correctly in the follow ing cases:  
The tape is recorded in the Hi8 / standard 8 mm system.  
There is a blank portion between IN and OUT on the tape.  
While making a program  
If you eject the cassette, NOT READY appears on the screen. The program will be  
erased.  
Recording folder  
You cannot change the recording folder.  
The recording folder you selected when the POWER switch was set to MEMORY is  
used (p. 162).  
158  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
– Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n a “ Me m o ry St ick” )  
Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g o n t o a “ Me m o ry St ick” )  
(1) Select VIDEO EDIT in the menu setting. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to  
select MEMORY, then press the dial.  
(2) Select START. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press  
the dial.  
Your camcorder searches for the beginning of the first program, then starts  
dubbing.  
The program mark flashes.  
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, the EDITING indicator and the  
REC indicator appear during writing of data on your camcorder, and the REC  
indicator appears during dubbing on the “Memory Stick.”  
The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing is complete.  
When the dubbing ends, your camcorder automatically stops.  
Then the display returns to the VIDEO EDIT initial screen.  
To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g  
Press x using the video control buttons.  
The program you made is recorded on a “Memory Stick” up to the place where you  
press x.  
To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g  
Press MENU.  
Note  
A blank portion may not be recorded on the “Memory Stick” correctly.  
NOT READY appears on the screen w hen:  
– The program to operate Digital program editing has not been made.  
– The “Memory Stick” is not inserted.  
– The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.  
When the “Memory Stick” does not have enough space to record  
The LOW MEMORY indicator appears on the screen. However, you can record pictures  
up to the time indicated.  
When available recording time is not left on the “Memory Stick”  
“MEMORY FULL” appears.  
159  
Se t t in g u p a fo ld e r  
You can create folders in a Memory stickand group recorded images in them.  
You can group images by selecting a folder for each recording, for convenient later  
reference.  
Images are recorded in the 101MSDCF folder unless other folders have been created.  
You can create folders up to 999MSDCF.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory stickinto your camcorder.  
Cre a t in g a n e w fo ld e r  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select NEW FOLDER in  
1
, then press the  
dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ADD, then press the dial.  
A new folder is created. The numeric part of the folder name is one larger than  
that of the last created folder. The image you record next time is stored in this  
newly created folder.  
1
3
MEM SET 1  
MEM SET 1  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER ADD  
REC FOLDER  
1
2
1
2
FILE NO.  
CURRENTLY  
101MSDCF  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
[
] :  
MENU END  
4
MEM SET 1  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER ADD  
REC FOLDER  
MEM SET 1  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
ADD  
RETURN  
1
1
2
FILE NO.  
2
PRINT MARK CURRENTLY  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
ADD FOLDER  
102MSDCF  
PROTECT  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
102MSDCF  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l cre a t in g a n e w fo ld e r  
Press  
RETURN in step (4).  
160  
Se t t in g u p a fo ld e r  
Notes  
• You cannot create folders in the following cases:  
No “Memory Stick” is inserted.  
– The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.  
– Folders have already been created in the “Memory Stick” up to the limit (up to  
folder 999MSDCF), or a folder named 999MSDCF already exists.  
• If you try to record an image in a folder that already contains 9999 images, or the  
folder contains an image named Dsc09999.jpg or Mov09999.mpg, a new folder is  
created automatically and the image is recorded in there.  
• Folders cannot be deleted with your camcorder.  
The folder in w hich images are recorded  
Images will be recorded in the same folder until you select another folder or create a  
new folder.  
161  
Se t t in g u p a fo ld e r  
Se le ct in g a re co rd in g fo ld e r  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select REC FOLDER in  
1
, then press the  
dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired folder, then press the dial.  
The image you record next time is recorded in this folder.  
1
3
MEM SET 1  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER 101MSDCF  
1
FILE NO.  
2
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
4
101  
REC FOLDER  
DATE:  
JUL  
12 : 24 : 00 AM  
FILES: 40  
101MSDCF  
102MSDCF  
103MSDCF  
104MSDCF  
105MSDCF  
106MSDCF  
107MSDCF  
4
2003  
[a]  
[b]  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[a]: The date when the folder is created  
[b]: The number of the files stored in the folder  
To ca n ce l se le ct in g a re co rd in g fo ld e r  
Press  
RETURN in step (3).  
Note  
You cannot select a recording folder in the following cases:  
No “Memory Stick” is inserted.  
– The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to LOCK.  
– Folder 100 MSDCF (The folder is only for playback).  
162  
— “ Me m o ry St ickOp e ra t io n s Pla yb a ck —  
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s  
Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
You can play back still images recorded on a Memory Stick.By selecting the index  
screen, you can also play back six images including moving pictures at a time arranged  
in the same order they are in the Memory Stick.”  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.  
(3) Press MEMORY +/ to select the desired still image.  
: To see the previous image  
+ : To see the next image  
2
3
PLAY  
To st o p m e m o ry p h o t o p la yb a ck  
Press MEMORY PLAY.  
Note  
You may not be able to play back images with your camcorder:  
When playing back image data modified on your computer.  
When playing back image data shot with other equipment.  
163  
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s – Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
Notes on the file name  
• The directory number may not be displayed and only the file name may be displayed  
if the structure of the directory does not conform to the DCF standard.  
• The file name flashes on the screen if the file is corrupted or the file is unreadable.  
To play back recorded images on a TV screen  
• Before operation, connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable  
supplied with your camcorder (p. 51).  
• When operating memory photo playback on a TV or the LCD screen, image quality  
may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is as good  
as ever.  
• Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be  
output from the TV speakers.  
When there is only one folder on the “Memory Stick” and no image is in it  
NO FILE” appears.  
PB (playback) folder  
You can select the PB folder only in MEMORY mode.  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g st ill im a g e p la yb a ck  
Image number/  
Total number of recorded images in the  
current PB folder  
101  
1 / 40  
MEMORY PLAY  
101-0001  
Current PB (playback) folder  
Print mark  
Protect  
JUL 4 2003  
12:05:56 PM  
Data code  
Data file name  
Wh e n a “ Me m o ry St ick” co n t a in s m u lt ip le fo ld e rs  
The following marks appear on the first and last images in a folder.  
: You can move to the previous folder.  
: You can move to the next folder.  
: You can move to both the previous and the next folder.  
Data code  
You can view data code (date/ time or various settings when recorded) by pressing  
DATA CODE on the Remote Commander.  
To make the indicators disappear  
Press DISPLAY.  
164  
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s – Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
Pla yin g b a ck six re co rd e d im a g e s a t a t im e (in d e x scre e n )  
You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when  
searching for a particular image.  
Before operation  
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MEMORY INDEX to display the index screen.  
2
INDEX  
A red B mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to  
the index screen mode.  
+ : To see the next images  
– : To see the previous images  
B mark  
1
4
2
5
3
6
101  
1 / 40  
101-0001  
To re t u rn t o t h e n o rm a l p la yb a ck scre e n (sin g le scre e n )  
Press MEMORY +/ – to move the B mark to the image you want to display on full  
screen, then press MEMORY PLAY.  
Note  
When displaying the index screen, the number appears above each image. This  
indicates the order in which images are recorded on the “Memory Stick.” These  
numbers are different from the data file names (p. 126).  
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment  
These files are sometimes not displayed on the index screen.  
165  
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s  
MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
You can play back moving pictures recorded on a Memory Stick.By selecting the  
index screen, you can also play back six images including still images at a time arranged  
in the same order they are in the Memory Stick.”  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.  
(3) Press MEMORY +/ to select the desired moving pictures.  
: To see the previous picture  
+ : To see the next picture  
(4) Press MPEG NX or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to start playback.  
(5) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.  
: To turn the volume down  
+ : To turn the volume up  
2
PLAY  
3
4
5
MPEG  
VOLUME  
To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Press MPEG NX or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
166  
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s – MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Note  
You may not be able to play back images with your camcorder:  
– When playing back image data modified on your computer.  
– When playing back image data shot with other equipment.  
To play back recorded images on a TV screen  
• Before operation, connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable  
supplied with your camcorder (p. 51).  
• Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be  
output from the TV speakers.  
When there is only one folder on the “Memory Stick” and no image is in it  
NO FILE” appears.  
PB (playback) folder  
You can select the PB folder only in MEMORY mode.  
Pla yin g b a ck a m o vin g p ict u re fro m t h e d e sire d p a rt  
The moving picture recorded on a “Memory Stick” is divided into 60 parts.  
You can select any point and play back the picture.  
(1) Follow steps (1) to (3) on page 166.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and select the point where you want to start  
playback, then press the dial.  
R : To see the next part  
r : To see the previous part  
As you turn the dial to select the playback scene you want, the bar and counter  
change to indicate the playback point.  
101  
50min  
2/20  
320  
MOV00001  
0:00:50  
–––  
–––  
(3) Press MPEG NX or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to start playback.  
(4) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.  
– : To turn the volume down  
+ : To turn the volume up  
To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Press MPEG NX or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
167  
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
When recording time is not long  
The moving picture may not be divided into 60 parts.  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g m o vin g p ict u re p la yb a ck  
Image size  
Picture number/ Total number of recorded  
pictures in the current PB folder  
101  
2 / 20  
320  
MOV00001  
0:00:12  
Current PB (playback) folder  
Playback time  
Protect  
JUL 4 2003  
12:05:56 PM  
Data code (date/ time)  
(Various settings are displayed as “– – –”.)  
Data file name  
Data code (date/time)  
You can view the data code (date/ time) by pressing DATA CODE on the Remote  
Commander during playback.  
To make the indicators disappear  
Press DISPLAY.  
168  
Se le ct in g a fo ld e r t o vie w  
You can select a folder to view images in it.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PB FOLDER in  
(p. 217).  
1
, then press the dial  
(4) Press MEMORY +/ to select the desired folder.  
: To view the previous folder  
+ : To view the next folder  
The first image in the current selected PB folder and the folder information are  
displayed.  
(5) Press MENU when you find the folder that contains images you want to view.  
Press MEMORY +/ to select the desired image in the folder.  
3
PB FOLDER  
101  
MEM SET 1  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
FOLDER NAME:  
DATE:  
101MSDCF  
JUL  
4
2003  
12 : 05 : 56 PM  
40  
[a]  
[b]  
1
2
FILES:  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
READY  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[+] / [--] : SELECT  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
MENU  
4,5  
[a]: The date when the folder is created  
[b]: The number of the files stored in the folder  
To ca n ce l se le ct in g t h e fo ld e r  
Press  
RETURN in step (3).  
Note  
Folders created, or renamed with your computer may not be recognized by your  
camcorder.  
Current PB folder  
The current PB folder is valid until the next recording is made. Once you record an  
image, the current recording folder becomes the current PB folder.  
When no image is in the PB folder  
NO FILE AVAILABLEappears.  
169  
Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry  
St ickt o a t a p e  
You can copy still images recorded on a Memory Stickto a tape.  
Before operation  
Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Using the video control buttons, search for a point where you want to record  
the desired still image. Set the tape to playback pause mode.  
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder.  
The tape is set to the recording pause mode.  
(4) Press MEMORY PLAY. The last recorded image is displayed.  
(5) Press MEMORY+/ to select the desired image.  
: To see the previous image  
+ : To see the next image  
(6) Press X to start recording and press X again to stop.  
The z indicator appears on the screen during recording.  
(7) If you have more to copy, repeat steps (5) to (6).  
2
3
REC  
6
4
5
PLAY  
PAUSE  
To st o p co p yin g  
Press x.  
170  
Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ickt o a t a p e  
During copying  
You cannot operate the following buttons:  
MEMORY PLAY  
MEMORY INDEX  
MEMORY DELETE  
MEMORY MIX  
MEMORY +/ –  
Note on the index screen  
You cannot record the index screen.  
If you press EDITSEARCH during pause mode  
Memory playback stops.  
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment  
You may not be able to copy modified images with your camcorder.  
When copying movies  
After step (6), press the MPEG NX button or SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and play back the  
image.  
171  
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n a  
Me m o ry St ick” – Me m o ry PB ZOOM  
You can enlarge still images recorded on a Memory Stick.You can select and view a  
desired part from the enlarged still image. Also, you can copy the desired part of the  
enlarged still image to a tape.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press PB ZOOM on your camcorder while you are playing back images  
recorded on the Memory Stick.The center of the image is enlarged to about  
twice its size, and  
appear on the screen.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the  
dial.  
: To view the upper part of the image  
: To view the lower part of the image  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to move the enlarged image, then press the  
dial.  
: To view the left part of the image (Turn the dial downward.)  
: To view the right part of the image (Turn the dial upward.)  
(5) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.  
You can enlarge the image from 1.1 times up to five times its size.  
W : To decrease the zoom ratio  
T : To increase the zoom ratio  
2
PB ZOOM  
PB ZOOM  
× 2.0  
3
5
[
]
EXEC : T t  
PB ZOOM  
× 2.0  
4
[
]
EXEC : r R  
172  
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Me m o ry PB ZOOM  
To ca n ce l Me m o ry PB ZOOM  
Press PB ZOOM.  
Memory PB ZOOM is canceled w hen the follow ing buttons are pressed:  
MENU  
MEMORY PLAY  
MEMORY INDEX  
MEMORY +/ –  
Moving pictures recorded on a Memory Stick”  
Memory PB ZOOM does not work.  
To copy the still image processed by Memory PB ZOOM to a tape  
See page 170.  
173  
Pla yin g b a ck im a g e s co n t in u o u sly  
SLIDE SHOW  
Your camcorder can play back images in sequence automatically. This function is useful  
especially when checking recorded images or during a presentation.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
2
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SLIDE SHOW in  
, then press the  
dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial.  
ALL FILES: All images in the Memory Stickare played back continuously.  
FOLDER sss*: All images in the current PB folder are played back  
continuously.  
* sss stands for the folder number.  
(5) Press MEMORY PLAY. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on the  
Memory Stickin sequence.  
The slide show ends after all images have been played back.  
2
MENU  
3
101  
MEM SET  
2
MEM SET  
SLIDE SHOW RETURN  
INT. R STL ALL FILES  
DELETE ALL FOLDER 101  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
2
SLIDE SHOW  
101 0021  
21/40  
SLIDE SHOW READY  
INT. R STL  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
5
PLAY  
1
2
1
2
RETURN  
[
] :  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
M
PLAY START MENU END  
To ca n ce l t h e slid e sh o w  
Select RETURN in step (4), then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
To p a u se d u rin g a slid e sh o w  
Press MEMORY PLAY.  
To st a rt t h e slid e sh o w fro m a p a rt icu la r im a g e  
Select the desired image using MEMORY +/ buttons before step (2).  
174  
Pla yin g b a ck im a g e s co n t in u o u sly SLIDE SHOW  
To view recorded images on TV  
Before operation, connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/ V connecting cable  
supplied with your camcorder (p. 51).  
If you change the Memory Stickduring operation  
The slide show does not operate. If you change the Memory Stick,be sure to follow  
the steps again from the beginning.  
175  
Pre ve n t in g a ccid e n t a l e ra su re  
Im a g e p ro t e ct io n  
You can protect selected images to prevent accidental erasure.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Play back the image you want to protect.  
(3) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PROTECT in 1 , then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(6) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear. The - mark is displayed  
beside the data file name of the protected image.  
MEM SET  
1
21/40  
MEM SET  
1
21/40  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
4
5
1
2
1
2
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
OFF  
ON  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
PB FOLDER OFF  
RETURN  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
3,6  
MEM SET  
1
21/40  
MEM SET  
1
21/40  
STILL SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
1
2
1
2
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
ON  
ON  
MENU  
PB FOLDER OFF  
RETURN  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l im a g e p ro t e ct io n  
Select OFF in step (5), then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The - mark disappears from the image.  
Note  
Formatting erases all information on the Memory Stick,including the protected  
image data. Before formatting a Memory Stick,check its contents.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
You cannot protect images.  
176  
De le t in g im a g e s DELETE  
You can delete images stored in a Memory Stick.You can delete all images or only  
selected images.  
De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Play back the image you want to delete.  
(3) Press MEMORY DELETE. The message DELETE? appears on the screen.  
(4) Press MEMORY DELETE again. The selected image is deleted.  
101  
DELETE  
1010021  
21/40  
3
DELETE  
DELETE?  
[
] :  
DELETE DEL  
[
] :  
CANCEL  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e  
Press MEMORY in step (4).  
To d e le t e a n im a g e d isp la ye d o n t h e in d e x scre e n  
Press MEMORY +/ to move the B indicator to the image and follow steps (3) and (4).  
Notes  
You cannot delete a protected image. To delete a protected image, first cancel image  
protection.  
Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Before deleting an image, carefully  
check the image.  
Even if you delete the last image in the folder, the folder itself is not deleted.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
You cannot delete images.  
177  
De le t in g im a g e s – DELETE  
De le t in g a ll im a g e s  
You can delete all unprotected images in a “Memory Stick.”  
Before operation  
Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY. Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select DELETE ALL in  
2
, then press the  
dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial.  
ALL FILES: All unprotected images in the “Memory Stick” are deleted.  
FOLDER sss*: All unprotected images in the current PB folder are deleted.  
* sss stands for the folder number.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes  
to EXECUTE.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial. The  
DELETING indicator flashes on the screen. When all unprotected images are  
deleted, The COMPLETE indicator is displayed.  
MEM SET  
SLIDE SHOW  
INT. R STL  
DELETE ALL READY  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
2
MEM SET  
SLIDE SHOW  
INT. R STL  
2
3
5
6
DELETE ALL RETURN  
1
2
1
2
FORMAT  
RETURN  
ALL FILES  
FOLDER 102  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MEM SET  
SLIDE SHOW  
INT. R STL  
2
MEM SET  
SLIDE SHOW  
INT. R STL  
2
2
DELETE ALL RETURN  
DELETE ALL RETURN  
1
2
FORMAT  
RETURN  
OK  
1
2
FORMAT  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
ALL FILES  
ALL FILES  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MEM SET  
SLIDE SHOW  
INT. R STL  
2
MEM SET  
SLIDE SHOW  
INT. R STL  
2
DELETE ALL DELETING  
FORMAT  
DELETE ALL COMPLETE  
FORMAT  
1
2
1
2
RETURN  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
178  
De le t in g im a g e s DELETE  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a ll t h e im a g e s  
Select RETURN in step (4) or (5), then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
Note  
You cannot delete the folders with your camcorder.  
While the DELETING indicator appears  
Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
You cannot delete images.  
179  
Writ in g a p rin t m a rk PRINT MARK  
You can specify a recorded still image to print out by writing a print mark. This  
function is useful for printing out still images later.  
Your camcorder conforms to the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for  
specifying still images to print out.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY or VCR. Make sure that the LOCK switch  
is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Play back the still image you want to write a print mark on.  
(3) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
1
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PRINT MARK in  
, then press the  
dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(6) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear. The  
mark is displayed  
beside the data file name of the image with a print mark.  
MEM SET  
1
21/40  
MEM SET  
1
21/40  
STILL SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
4
5
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
PRINT MARK OFF  
PROTECT  
1
2
1
2
PRINT MARK ON  
PROTECT  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
OFF  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MEM SET  
1
21/40  
MEM SET  
1
21/40  
3,6  
STILL SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
MOVIE SET  
NEW FOLDER  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
PRINT MARK ON  
PROTECT  
1
2
1
2
PRINT MARK ON  
PROTECT  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
OFF  
PB FOLDER  
RETURN  
MENU  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l w rit in g o f p rin t m a rks  
Select OFF in step (5), then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The mark disappears from the image.  
180  
Writ in g a p rin t m a rk PRINT MARK  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
You cannot write print marks on still images.  
Moving pictures  
You cannot write print marks on moving pictures.  
While the file name is flashing  
You cannot write the print mark on the still image.  
181  
Vie w in g Im a g e s o n Yo u r Co m p u t e r —  
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r  
In t ro d u ct io n  
The following are ways of connecting the camcorder to a computer to view images  
saved on a Memory Stick*  
, recorded on tape or live from your  
camcorder on your computer.  
* To view images on a computer which has a Memory Stick slot, first remove the  
Memory Stickfrom the camcorder and then insert it into the computers Memory  
Stick slot.  
Camcorder Connection  
jack  
Connection  
cable  
Computer environment  
requirements  
(USB) jack  
(USB) cable  
(supplied)  
(USB) connector,  
editing software  
Tape stills and  
movies/ Picture  
live from your  
camcorder  
i.LINK cable  
(optional)  
i.LINK connector,  
editing software  
DV jack  
Memory Stick”  
stills and  
movies  
(USB) cable  
(supplied)  
(USB) connector,  
editing software  
(USB) jack  
When connecting to a computer via the USB jack, complete installation of the  
USB driver beforehand. If you connect the camcorder to the computer first,  
you w ill not be able to install the USB driver correctly.  
For details about your computers jacks and editing software, contact the computer  
manufacturer.  
182  
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r In t ro d u ct io n  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r  
USB St re a m in g  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(p . 187)  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
Fo llo w t h e in st ru ct io n s in o rd e r d e scrib e d b e lo w  
System requirements (p. 187)  
r
Installing the USB driver (p. 189)  
r
Installing ImageMixer (p. 191)  
r
Making the computer recognize the camcorder (p. 192)  
r
Capturing images with ImageMixer (p. 197)  
Viewing pictures recorded on a tape (p. 197)  
Viewing pictures live from your camcorder (p. 199)  
Capturing still images (p. 199)  
Capturing moving pictures (p. 200)  
183  
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r – In t ro d u ct io n  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e i.LINK ca b le  
Your computer must have an i.LINK connector and editing software installed that can  
read video signals.  
Refer to the operating instructions of the software for further information.  
i.LINK  
is marked on  
DV  
this side.  
i.LINK cable (optional)  
: Signal flow  
184  
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r In t ro d u ct io n  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
You can also use a Memory Stick Reader/ Writer (optional).  
Fo llo w t h e in st ru ct io n s in o rd e r d e scrib e d b e lo w  
System requirements (p. 188)  
r
Installing the USB driver (p. 189)  
r
Installing Image Transfer (p. 190)  
r
Making the computer recognize the camcorder (p. 192)  
r
Viewing images with Image Transfer (p. 202)  
Viewing images without Image Transfer (p. 203)  
System requirements (p. 205)  
r
Installing the USB driver (p. 206)  
r
Viewing images (p. 207)  
185  
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r In t ro d u ct io n  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h o u t a USB co n n e ct o r  
Use an optional floppy disk adaptor for Memory Stick or a PC card adaptor for Memory  
Stick.  
When purchasing an accessory, check its catalog beforehand for the recommended  
operating environment.  
When connecting w ith USB port  
You cannot operate your camcorder setting the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
No t e s o n u sin g yo u r co m p u t e r  
Me m o ry St ick”  
• “Memory Stickoperations on your camcorder cannot be assured if a Memory Stick”  
formatted on your computer is used on your camcorder, or if the Memory Stickin  
your camcorder was formatted from your computer when the USB cable was  
connected.  
Do not compress the data on the Memory Stick.Compressed files cannot be played  
back on your camcorder.  
So ft w a re  
Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a  
still image file.  
When you load an image modified using retouching software from your computer to  
your camcorder or when you directly modify the image on your camcorder, the image  
format will differ so a file error indicator may appear and you may be unable to open  
the file.  
Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after  
recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.  
186  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r  
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Complete installation of the USB driver before connecting the camcorder to  
the computer. If you connect the camcorder to the computer first, you w ill not  
be able to install the USB driver correctly.  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
You must install a USB driver onto your computer to connect the camcorder to the  
computers USB connector. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied,  
along with the application software required for viewing images.  
Syst e m re q u ire m e n t s  
To view pictures recorded on a tape or live from your camcorder  
OS:  
Microsoft Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP  
Home Edition or Windows XP Professional.  
Standard installation is required.  
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.  
You cannot hear sound if your computer is running Windows 98, but you can read still  
images.  
CPU:  
Minimum 500 MHz Intel Pentium III or faster (800 MHz or faster recommended)  
Application:  
DirectX 8.0a or later  
Sound system:  
16 bit stereo sound card and stereo speakers  
Memory:  
64 MB or more  
Hard disk:  
Available memory required for installation:  
at least 250 MB  
Available hard disk memory recommended:  
at least 1 GB (depending on the size of the image files edited)  
Display:  
4 MB VRAM video card, Minimum 800 × 600 dot high color (16 bit color, 65 000 colors),  
Direct Draw display driver capability. (At 800 × 600 dot or less, 256 colors and less, this  
product will not operate correctly)  
Others:  
The USB connector must be provided as standard.  
This product is based on DirectX technology, so it is necessary to install DirectX.  
You cannot use this function in the Macintosh environment.  
187  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Syst e m re q u ire m e n t s  
To view images recorded on a Memory Stick”  
OS:  
Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,  
Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional.  
Standard installation is required.  
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.  
CPU:  
MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster  
Display:  
Minimum 800 × 600 dot high color (16 bit color, 65 000 colors). (At 800 × 600 dot or less,  
256 colors and less, the screen for installing USB driver is not displayed.)  
Others:  
The USB connector must be provided as standard.  
Windows Media Player must be installed (to play back moving pictures).  
Notes  
Operations are not guaranteed for the Windows environment if you connect two or  
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.  
Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is  
used simultaneously.  
Operations are not guaranteed for all system requirements mentioned above.  
188  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r  
Start the follow ing operation w ithout connecting the USB cable to your  
computer.  
Connect the USB cable according to Making the computer recognize the  
camcorder.”  
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.  
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The  
application software starts up. If the screen does not appear, double-click My  
Computerand then ImageMixer(CD-ROM Drive).  
(3) Select Handycamon the screen.  
Click  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Move the cursor to USB Driverand click. This starts USB driver installation.  
Click  
(5) Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver.  
(6) Remove the CD-ROM and then restart the computer, following the  
instructions on the screen.  
Note  
If you connect the USB cable before USB driver installation is complete, the USB driver  
will not be properly registered. Carry out installation again following the steps on page  
194.  
189  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
In st a llin g Im a g e Tra n sfe r  
Image Transfer enables image data recorded on a Memory Stickto be automatically  
transferred (copied) to your computer.  
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.  
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The  
application software starts up.  
(3) Select Handycamon the screen.  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Move the cursor to Image Transferand click.  
Click  
The Install Wizard program starts up and the Choose Setup Language”  
screen appears.  
(5) Select the language for installation.  
(6) Follow the on-screen messages.  
The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.  
190  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
In st a llin g Im a g e Mixe r  
ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sonyis an application that can capture or edit images, or  
create video CDs.  
If you are using Windows 2000, log in with permission of administrators.  
If you are using Windows XP, log in with permission of computer administrators.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
The application software starts up.  
(3) Select Handycamon the screen.  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Move the cursor to ImageMixerand click.  
Click  
The Install Wizard program starts up and the Choose Setup Language”  
screen appears.  
(5) Select the language for installation.  
(6) Follow the on-screen messages.  
The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.  
(7) If DirectX 8.0a or later version is not installed on your computer, continue  
installation after installing ImageMixer.  
Follow the on-screen messages to install DirectX. After installation is complete,  
restart your computer.  
Note  
The title screen is not displayed if the screen size of your computer is set to less than 800  
× 600 dots and 256 colors or less. See page 187 about the System requirements.  
Memory Mix Album  
Once ImageMixeris installed, the Memory Mix album is created in Albumof  
ImageMixerand sample images are stored in there.  
Those sample images can be transferred from the Memory Mix album to a Memory  
Stickso that they can be used in MEMORY MIX (p. 140).  
For details on the operation procedure, refer to the on-line help.  
191  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Ma kin g t h e co m p u t e r re co g n ize t h e ca m co rd e r  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r  
ca m co rd e r  
(1) Connect the AC Adaptor to your camcorder. Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Select USB STREAM in  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 221).  
(3) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
Your computer recognizes your camcorder, and the Windows Add Hardware  
Wizard starts.  
(4) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes  
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts  
three times because three different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow  
the installation to complete without interrupting it.  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
192  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Ma kin g t h e co m p u t e r re co g n ize t h e ca m co rd e r  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
(1) Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(2) Connect the AC Adaptor and set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(3) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
USB MODEappears on the screen of your camcorder. Your computer  
recognizes the camcorder, and the Add Hardware Wizard starts.  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
(4) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes  
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts  
two times because two different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow  
each installation to complete without interrupting them.  
You cannot install the USB driver if a Memory Stickis not in your camcorder.  
Be sure to insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder before installing the USB  
driver.  
193  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
If yo u ca n n o t in st a ll t h e USB d rive r  
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your  
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Perform the following  
procedure to correctly install the USB driver.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r  
ca m co rd e r  
Step 1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver  
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
2 Connect the AC Adaptor, and set the POWER switch to VCR.  
3 Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
4 Open your computers Device Manager.”  
Window s XP:  
Select Startt Control Panelt Systemt Hardwaretab and click  
the Device Managerbutton.  
If there is no Systeminside Pick a categoryafter clicking Control Panel,”  
click Switch to classic viewinstead.  
Window s 2000:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt Systemt Hardwaretab  
and click the Device Managerbutton.  
Window s 98SE/Window s Me:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt System,and click Device  
Manager.”  
194  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
5 Select and delete the underlined devices.  
Window s 98SE  
Window s Me  
Window s 2000  
Window s XP  
195  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
6 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then  
disconnect the USB cable.  
7 Restart your computer.  
Step 2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM  
Perform the entire procedure described in Installing the USB driveron page 189.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Step 1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver  
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
2 Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
3 Connect the AC Adaptor, and set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
4 Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
5 Open your computers Device Manager.”  
Window s XP:  
Select Startt Control Panelt Systemt Hardwaretab and click  
the Device Managerbutton.  
If there is no Systeminside Pick a categoryafter clicking Control Panel,”  
click Switch to classic viewinstead.  
Window s 2000:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt Systemt Hardwaretab,  
and click the Device Managerbutton.  
Other OS:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt System,and click Device  
Manager.”  
6 Select Other devices.”  
Select the device prefixed with the ?mark and delete.  
Ex: (?)Sony Handycam  
7 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then  
disconnect the USB cable.  
8 Restart your computer.  
Step 2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM  
Perform the entire procedure described in Installing the USB driveron page 189.  
196  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r  
live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r o n yo u r  
co m p u t e r – USB St re a m in g  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s w it h Im a g e Mixe r  
You need to install the USB driver and ImageMixer to view images recorded on a tape  
with your computer (p. 189, 191).  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Connect the AC Adaptor, and insert a tape into your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
Select USB STREAM in  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 221).  
(4) Select “Start” t “Program” t “PIXELA” t “ImageMixer” t “ImageMixer  
Ver.1.5 for Sony.”  
The “ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sony” startup screen appears on your computer.  
The title screen is displayed.  
(5) Click  
on the screen.  
197  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r  
o n yo u r co m p u t e r USB St re a m in g  
(6) Select  
.
Monitor window  
(7) Connect the USB connector on your computer to the (USB) jack on your  
camcorder using the supplied USB cable.  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
198  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r  
o n yo u r co m p u t e r USB St re a m in g  
(8) Press N to start playback.  
You can control video operations with the buttons on the screen.  
The picture appears in the monitor windows on your computer.  
Monitor window  
Video control  
buttons  
Vie w in g p ict u re s live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r  
(1) Follow the steps (1), (2) on page 197.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
Select USB STREAM in  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 221).  
(3) Follow the steps (4) to (7) on pages 197 and 198.  
The picture from your camcorder appears in the monitor window on your  
computer.  
Ca p t u rin g st ill im a g e s  
Monitor window  
Thumbnail list window  
(1) Select  
.
(2) Looking at the monitor window, move the cursor to  
point you want to capture.  
and click it at the  
The still image on the screen is captured.  
Captured images are displayed in the thumbnail list window.  
199  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r  
o n yo u r co m p u t e r USB St re a m in g  
Ca p t u rin g m o vin g p ict u re s  
Thumbnail list window  
Monitor window  
Video control buttons  
(1) Select  
(2) Look at the monitor window and click on  
you want to capture. changes to  
(3) Look at the monitor window and click on  
.
at the first scene of the movie  
at the last scene you want to  
.
capture. The captured images appear in the thumbnail list window.  
To clo se Im a g e Mixe r”  
Click  
in the upper right corner of the screen.  
Notes  
When you view images on your computer with the USB connection, the following  
may occur. This is not a malfunction:  
The image shakes up and down.  
Some images are not displayed correctly due to noise, etc.  
Some images are displayed with the cracking noise.  
Images of different color systems to that of your camcorder are not displayed  
correctly.  
When your camcorder is in the standby mode with a cassette inserted, it turns off  
automatically after three minutes.  
We recommend setting DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu settings when your  
camcorder is in the standby mode, and no cassette is inserted.  
Indicators on the screen do not appear on images that are captured into your  
computer.  
You cannot carry out any Memory Stickoperations during the USB Streaming.  
200  
Vie w in g p ict u re s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o r live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r  
o n yo u r co m p u t e r USB St re a m in g  
If image data cannot be transferred by the USB connection  
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your  
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Reinstall the USB driver  
following the procedure on page 194.  
If any trouble occurs  
Close all running applications, then restart your computer.  
Carry out the follow ing operations after quitting the application:  
Disconnect the USB cable.  
Set the POWER switch to another position or OFF (CHG) on your camcorder.  
Se e in g t h e o n -lin e h e lp (o p e ra t in g in st ru ct io n s) o f Im a g e Mixe r  
A ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sonyon-line help site is available where you can find  
detailed operating information.  
(1) Click the  
button located in the upper-right corner of the screen.  
The ImageMixers Manual screen appears.  
(2) You can find the information you need from the list of contents.  
To exit on-line help  
Click the  
button in the top right corner of the screen.  
If you have any questions about ImageMixer  
ImageMixer Ver.1.5 for Sonyis the product of PIXELA corporation. For more  
information, refer to the instruction manual of the CD-ROM supplied with your  
camcorder.  
201  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry  
St icko n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h Im a g e Tra n sfe r  
The image data recorded on a Memory Stickis automatically transferred (copied) to  
your computer with Image Transfer. You can also view images with ImageMixer.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder, and connect the AC Adaptor to  
your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
(5) Image Transfer automatically starts up and the transfer of image data begins.  
(6) ImageMixer automatically starts up, enabling you to view the copied image.  
Import button  
(7) Select an album and the image, then press the import button.  
The image is added in your album, and you can edit the image.  
202  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St icko n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Vie w in g im a g e s w it h o u t Im a g e Tra n sfe r  
Before operation  
An application such as Windows Media Player must be installed to play back moving  
pictures in Windows environment.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder, and connect the AC Adaptor to  
your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder to the USB connector on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
USB MODEappears on the LCD screen of your camcorder.  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
(5) Open My Computeron Windows and double-click the newly recognized  
drive (e.g. Removable Disk (F:)).  
The folders inside the Memory Stickare displayed.  
(6) Double-click the desired image file from the folder in this order.  
1)  
2)  
Dcimfolder t sssmsdcffolder * t Image file *  
For the detailed folder and file name, see Image file storage destinations and  
image files(p. 204).  
1)  
* sss stands for any number (within the range) from 101 to 999.  
2)  
*
Copying a moving picture file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is  
recommended. If you play back the file directly from the Memory Stick,the image  
and sound may break off.  
203  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St icko n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Im a g e file st o ra g e d e st in a t io n s a n d im a g e file s  
Image files recorded with your camcorder are grouped in folders described below.  
The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number within  
the range from 0001 to 9999.  
Exa m p le : Fo r Win d o w s Me u se rs  
(Th e d rive re co g n izin g yo u r ca m co rd e r is [F:].)  
Folder containing image files recorded using  
other camcorders w ithout the folder creation  
function (for playback only)  
Folder containing image files recorded w ith your  
camcorder  
When no new folders have been created, this is  
only 101MSDCF”  
Folder containing moving picture data recorded  
using other camcorders w ithout the folder  
creation function (for playback only)  
Folder  
101MSDCF  
(up to 999MSDCF)  
File  
Meaning  
Still image file  
Moving picture file  
DSC0ssss.JPG  
MOV0ssss.MPG  
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d re m o ve t h e Me m o ry St icko r se t  
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF (CHG)  
For Window s 2000, Window s Me, Window s XP users  
(1) Move the cursor to the  
Unplug or Eject Hardwareon the Task Tray and  
click to cancel the applicable drive.  
(2) After the Safe to removemessage appears, disconnect the USB cable and  
eject the Memory Stickor set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
204  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r  
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
You must install a USB driver onto your computer in order to connect the camcorder to  
the computers USB connector. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied,  
along with the application software required for viewing images.  
Syst e m re q u ire m e n t s  
OS:  
Mac OS 8.5.1/ 8.6/ 9.0/ 9.1/ 9.2 or Mac OS X (v10.0/ v10.1)  
Standard installation is required.  
However, note that upgrade to Mac OS 9.0/ 9.1 should be used for the following  
models:  
iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive  
iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation  
Others:  
The USB connector must be provided as standard.  
QuickTime 3.0 or later must be installed to play back moving pictures.  
Notes  
Operations are not guaranteed for the Macintosh environment if you connect two or  
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.  
Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is  
used simultaneously.  
Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments  
mentioned above.  
205  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r  
For Mac OS 9.1/9.2/Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1)  
The USB driver does not have to be installed. Your camcorder is automatically  
recognized as a drive just by connecting it to your Mac using the USB cable.  
For Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 users  
Do not connect the USB cable to your computer before installation of the USB  
driver is completed.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow the Mac OS to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
The application software screen appears.  
(3) Select Handycamon the screen.  
The title screen appears.  
(4) Click USB Driverto open the folder containing the six files related to  
Driver.”  
Click  
(5) Select the following two files, and drag and drop them into the System Folder.  
Sony Camcorder USB Driver  
Sony Camcorder USB Shim  
(6) When the message appears, click OK.”  
The USB driver is installed on your computer.  
(7) Remove the CD-ROM from the computer.  
(8) Restart your computer.  
206  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry  
St icko n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Vie w in g im a g e s  
Before operation  
You need to install the USB driver to view a Memory Stickimages on your  
computer (p. 206).  
QuickTime 3.0 or later must be installed to play back moving pictures.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Mac OS to load.  
(2) Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder, and connect the AC Adaptor to  
your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY.  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB jack on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
USB MODEappears on the screen of your camcorder.  
(5) Double-click the Memory Stickicon on the desktop.  
The folders inside the Memory Stickare displayed.  
(6) Double-click the desired image file from the folder in this order.  
1)  
2)  
Dcimfolder t sssmsdcffolder * t Image file *  
1)  
2)  
* sss stands for any number (within the range) from 101 to 999.  
*
Copying a moving picture file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is  
recommended. If you play back the file directly from the Memory Stick,the image  
and sound may break off.  
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d re m o ve t h e Me m o ry St icko r se t  
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF (CHG)  
(1) Close all running applications.  
Make sure that the access lamp of your camcorder is not lit.  
(2) Drag the Memory Stickicon into the Trash.Alternatively, select the  
Memory Stickicon by clicking it, and then select Eject diskfrom the  
Specialmenu at the top left of the screen.  
(3) Unplug the USB cable or eject the Memory Stick.Set the POWER switch of  
your camcorder to OFF (CHG).  
For Mac OS X (v10.0) users  
Shut down your computer, then unplug the USB cable, eject the Memory Stickor set  
the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
207  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o u n it  
o n yo u r co m p u t e r Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n  
You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit on your computer which  
has the i.LINK connector by transmitting data via your camcorder.  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to set A/ V t DV OUT in  
to ON (p. 214).  
(4) Start playback on the analog video unit.  
(5) Start procedures for capturing images and sound on your computer.  
The operation procedures depend on your computer and the software you are  
using.  
For details on how to capture images, refer to the operating instructions of  
your computer and the software you are using.  
S VIDEO  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
VCR  
i.LINK  
OUT  
DV  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
Yellow  
i.LINK cable  
(optional)  
AUDIO  
A/ V connecting  
cable (supplied)  
White  
Red  
is marked on  
this side.  
: Signal flow  
Aft e r ca p t u rin g im a g e s a n d so u n d  
Stop capturing procedures on your computer, and stop playback on the analog video  
unit.  
208  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o u n it o n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n  
Notes  
You need the software and computer that support the exchange of digital video  
signals.  
Depending on the state of the analog video signals, your computer may not be able to  
output images correctly when you convert analog video signals into digital video  
signals via your camcorder.  
You cannot record or capture video output via your camcorder when the video tapes  
include copyright protection signals such as the ID-2 system.  
If your computer has a USB jack  
You can connect your camcorder to your computer using the USB cable supplied with  
your camcorder. Note, however, that the image may flicker.  
If your VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
VCR.  
209  
Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r —  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the SEL/  
PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon,  
then the menu item and then the mode.  
(1) In CAMERA, VCR/ PLAYER or MEMORY mode, press MENU to display the  
menu settings.*  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to  
set.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to  
set.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, and press the dial  
to set.  
(5) If you want to change other items, select  
RETURN and press the dial, then  
repeat steps from (2) to (4).  
For details, see Selecting the mode setting of each item(p. 211).  
CAMERA  
1
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
P
D
FLASH MODE  
AUTO SHTR  
2
3
4
MENU  
[
]
MENU : END  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE SP  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
RETURN  
VCR/PLAYER*  
MANUAL SET  
P
D
EFFECT  
EFFECT  
1
[
]
[
]
MENU : END  
MENU : END  
[
]
MENU : END  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
FRAME REC ON  
INT. REC  
RETURN  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
RETURN  
MEMORY  
*
AUTO  
AUTO  
MANUAL SET  
PROGRAM AE  
FLASH MODE  
AUTO SHTR  
1
2
[
]
[
]
MENU : END  
MENU : END  
[
]
MENU : END  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
FRAME REC ON  
INT. REC  
RETURN  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
AUTO  
ON  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
RETURN  
[
]
[
]
MENU : END  
MENU : END  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
210  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
To m a ke t h e m e n u d isp la y d isa p p e a r  
Press MENU.  
Menu items are displayed as the follow ing icons:  
MANUAL SET  
CAMERA SET  
VCR SET  
PLAYER SET  
LCD SET  
MEM SET 1  
1
MEM SET 2  
2
TAPE SET  
SETUP MENU  
OTHERS  
Depending on your camcorder model  
The menu display may be different from that in this illustration.  
Se le ct in g t h e m o d e se t t in g o f e a ch it e m z is the default setting.  
Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch.  
The screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment.  
POWER  
sw itch *  
1)  
Mode  
Meaning  
Icon/item  
MANUAL SET  
To suit your specific shooting requirement  
(p. 68).  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
PROGRAM AE  
To add special effects, like those in films or on  
TV, to images (p. 64).  
CAMERA  
P EFFECT  
(in recording)  
To add special effects, like those in films or on  
TV, to images (p. 83).  
VCR  
P EFFECT  
(in playback) *  
2)  
3)  
To add special effects using the various digital  
functions (p. 65, 85).  
VCR  
CAMERA  
D EFFECT *  
3)  
z ON  
To fire the flash (optional) regardless of the  
brightness of the surroundings.  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
FLASH MODE *  
AUTO  
To fire the flash automatically.  
2)  
z ON  
To automatically activate the electronic shutter  
when shooting in bright conditions.  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
AUTO SHTR *  
OFF  
To not automatically activate the electronic  
shutter even when shooting in bright conditions.  
1)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
2)  
*
3)  
*
(continued on the following page)  
211  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
3)  
Notes on FLASH MODE *  
• You cannot adjust FLASH MODE if the external flash (optional) is not compatible  
with the FLASH MODE.  
• You cannot adjust FLASH MODE if the external flash (optional) is not connected.  
2)  
Note on AUTO SHTR *  
The Auto Shutter function electronically adjusts the shutter speed.  
1)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
2)  
*
3)  
*
POWER  
sw itch *  
1)  
Icon/item  
CAMERA SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
2)  
SELFTIMER *  
z OFF  
To not use the self-timer function.  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
ON  
To use the self-timer function (p. 41, 55, 135,  
149).  
3)  
D ZOOM  
*
z OFF  
40×  
To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 20× zoom  
CAMERA  
is performed.  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 20× to  
40× zoom is performed digitally (p. 34).  
560×  
z OFF  
40×  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 20× to  
560× zoom is performed digitally (p. 34).  
4)  
*
To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 20× zoom  
is performed.  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 20× to  
40× zoom is performed digitally (p. 34).  
700×  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 20× to  
700× zoom is performed digitally (p. 34).  
5)  
16:9WIDE  
*
z OFF  
ON  
CAMERA  
CAMERA  
To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 58).  
6)  
*
z OFF  
CINEMA  
16:9FULL  
To record in the CINEMA mode (p. 59).  
To record in the 16:9FULL mode.  
1)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
5)  
*
6)  
*
7)  
*
212  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch *  
1)  
Icon/item  
CAMERA SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
7)  
STEADYSHOT * z ON  
To compensate for camera-shake.  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
OFF  
To cancel the SteadyShot function. Natural  
pictures are produced when shooting a  
stationary subject with a tripod.  
N.S.LIGHT  
z ON  
To use the NightShot Light function (p. 39).  
To cancel the NightShot Light function.  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
OFF  
7)  
Notes on the SteadyShot function *  
The SteadyShot function will not correct excessive camera-shake.  
Attachment of a conversion lens (optional) may influence the SteadyShot function.  
7)  
If you cancel the SteadyShot function *  
The SteadyShot off indicator  
appears on the screen. Your camcorder prevents  
excessive compensation for camera-shake.  
1)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
5)  
*
6)  
*
7)  
*
213  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch *  
1)  
Icon/item  
VCR SET  
PLAYER SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
2)  
z STEREO  
HiFi SOUND *  
To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track  
tape with main and sub sound (p. 238).  
VCR  
1
2
To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or  
a dual sound track tape with main sound.  
To play back a stereo tape with the right sound  
or a dual sound track tape with sub sound.  
3)  
z OFF  
ON  
EDIT *  
PLAYER  
To minimize picture deterioration when editing.  
To correct jitter.  
4) 5)  
z ON  
OFF  
TBC * *  
VCR/  
PLAYER  
To not correct jitter. Set TBC to OFF when  
playing back a tape on which you have dubbed  
over and recorded the signal of a TV game or  
similar machine.  
TBC stands for Time Base Corrector.”  
4) 5)  
z ON  
DNR * *  
To reduce picture noise.  
VCR/  
PLAYER  
OFF  
To reduce a conspicuous afterimage when the  
picture has a lot of movement.  
DNR stands for Digital Noise Reduction.”  
2)  
AUDIO MIX *  
To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and  
stereo 2.  
VCR  
VCR  
ST1  
ST2  
z OFF  
A/V t  
To output digital images and sound in analog  
format using your camcorder.  
6)  
DV OUT *  
ON  
To output analog images and sound in digital  
format using your camcorder (p. 208).  
1)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
5)  
* When you play back tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm system only  
6)  
*
214  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch *  
1)  
Icon/item  
VCR SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
PLAYER SET  
6)  
To automatically select the system (Hi8  
/
z AUTO  
PB MODE *  
VCR  
standard 8 mm or Digital8 ) that was used  
to record on the tape, and play back the tape.  
To play back a tape that was recorded in the  
/
Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm system when your  
camcorder does not automatically distinguish  
the recording system.  
After five minutes of removing the pow er source  
2)  
3)  
2)  
The HiFi SOUND * , EDIT * and AUDIO MIX * items are returned to their default  
settings.  
2)  
Notes on AUDIO MIX *  
You can adjust the balance only for tapes recorded in the Digital8 system.  
When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance.  
6)  
Note on PB MODE *  
The mode will return to the default setting when:  
you remove the power source.  
you turn the POWER switch.  
1)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
5)  
* When you play back tapes recorded in the Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm system only  
6)  
*
215  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
Icon/item  
LCD SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
sw itch *  
LCD BRIGHT  
To adjust the brightness on the LCD screen with VCR/  
the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
PLAYER  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
To darken  
To lighten  
LCD B.L.  
z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness of the LCD screen  
VCR/  
backlight to normal.  
PLAYER  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
BRIGHT  
To brighten the LCD screen backlight.  
LCD COLOR  
To adjust the color on the LCD screen, turning  
the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the  
following bar.  
VCR/  
PLAYER  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
To get low-  
intensity  
To get high-  
intensity  
Notes on LCD B.L.  
• When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during  
recording.  
• When you use power sources other than the battery pack, BRIGHT is automatically  
selected.  
Even if you adjust LCD BRIGHT, LCD B.L., LCD COLOR  
The recorded picture will not be affected.  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
216  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
MEM SET 1  
Mode  
Meaning  
1
STILL SET  
QUALITY  
z FINE  
To record still images in fine image quality  
mode (p. 128).  
VCR  
MEMORY  
STANDARD  
To record still images in standard image quality  
mode.  
FLD/FRAME z FIELD  
To record moving subjects correcting jitter  
(p. 132).  
MEMORY  
FRAME  
To record stationary subjects in high quality.  
MOVIE SET  
IMAGESIZE  
z 320 × 240  
To record moving pictures in 320 × 240 size  
(p. 130).  
VCR  
MEMORY  
160 × 112  
To record moving pictures in 160 × 112 size.  
REMAIN  
z AUTO  
To display the remaining capacity of the  
“Memory Stick” in the following cases:  
• For five seconds after you set the POWER  
switch to VCR or MEMORY.  
VCR  
MEMORY  
• For five seconds after inserting a “Memory  
Stick” into your camcorder.  
• When the capacity of the “Memory Stick” is  
less than a few minutes in MEMORY mode.  
• For five seconds after you start recording a  
moving picture.  
• For five seconds after you stop recording a  
moving picture.  
ON  
To always display the remaining capacity of the  
“Memory Stick.”  
NEW FOLDER  
z ADD  
RETURN  
To create a new folder (p. 160).  
To cancel creating a new folder.  
MEMORY  
REC FOLDER  
FILE NO.  
To select a folder in which images are recorded  
(p. 162).  
MEMORY  
VCR  
z SERIES  
To assign numbers to files in sequence even if  
the “Memory Stick” is changed. However, when MEMORY  
a new folder is created or the recording folder is  
changed, the file number sequence is reset.  
RESET  
ON  
To reset the file numbering each time the  
“Memory Stick” is changed.  
PRINT MARK  
PROTECT  
To write a print mark on recorded still images  
you want to print out later (p. 180).  
VCR  
MEMORY  
z OFF  
To cancel print marks on still images.  
ON  
To protect selected images against accidental  
erasure (p. 176).  
VCR  
MEMORY  
z OFF  
To not protect images.  
PB FOLDER  
To select a folder that contains images to be  
played back (p. 169).  
MEMORY  
217  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
MEM SET 2  
Mode  
Meaning  
2
SLIDE SHOW  
INT.R -STL  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
z ALL FILES  
To cancel the slide show.  
MEMORY  
To play back all images in the “Memory Stick”  
continuously (p. 174).  
1)  
FOLDER sss * To play back all images in the current PB folder  
continuously.  
ON  
To activate the interval photo recording function MEMORY  
(p. 154).  
z OFF  
To deactivate the interval photo recording  
function.  
SET  
To set INTERVAL for interval photo recording.  
z RETURN  
ALL FILES  
To cancel deleting all images.  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
To delete all unprotected images in the  
“Memory Stick” (p. 178).  
1)  
FOLDER sss * To delete all unprotected images in the current  
PB folder.  
z RETURN  
To cancel formatting.  
OK  
To format an inserted “Memory Stick.”  
Formatting erases all information on a  
“Memory Stick.”  
1. Select FORMAT with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC  
dial, then press the dial.  
2. Select OK with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial,  
then press the dial.  
3. After EXECUTE appears, press the SEL/  
PUSH EXEC dial. The FORMATTING  
indicator flashes during formatting. The  
COMPLETE indicator appears when  
formatting is finished.  
Notes on formatting  
• Formatting erases all folders.  
• Formatting erases all images even if they are protected.  
• The supplied “Memory Stick” has been formatted at factory. Formatting the “Memory  
2)  
Stick” on your camcorder is not required.*  
• Do not do any of the following while the FORMATTING indicator is displayed:  
– Switch the POWER switch  
– Operate buttons  
– Eject the “Memory Stick”  
– Remove the power source  
• You cannot format the “Memory Stick” if the write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick”  
is set to LOCK.  
• Format the “Memory Stick” when “  
FORMAT ERROR” is displayed.  
1)  
* sss stands for the folder number.  
2)  
*
218  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch *  
1)  
Icon/item  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
Mode  
Meaning  
z SP  
To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode.  
VCR  
CAMERA  
2)  
3)  
LP  
To increase the recording time to 1.5 * / 2 *  
times the SP mode.  
2)  
4)  
AUDIO MODE * z 12BIT  
To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo  
sounds).  
VCR *  
CAMERA  
16BIT  
To record in the 16-bit mode (one stereo sound  
with high quality).  
3)  
ORC TO SET *  
To automatically adjust the recording condition  
to get the best possible recording. Press START/  
STOP to start adjustment. Your camcorder takes  
about 10 seconds to check the tape condition  
and then returns to the standby mode.  
CAMERA  
ORC stands for Optimizing the Recording Condition.”  
q REMAIN  
z AUTO  
To display the remaining tape bar:  
For about eight seconds after your camcorder  
is turned on and calculates the remaining  
amount of tape.  
VCR/  
PLAYER  
CAMERA  
For about eight seconds after a cassette is  
inserted and your camcorder calculates the  
remaining amount of tape.  
For about eight seconds after N is pressed in  
VCR/ PLAYER mode.  
For about eight seconds after DISPLAY is  
pressed to display the screen indicators.  
For the period of tape rewinding, forwarding  
or picture search in VCR/ PLAYER mode.  
ON  
z OFF  
ON  
To always display the remaining tape bar.  
To deactivate the frame recording.  
2)  
FRAME REC *  
CAMERA  
CAMERA  
To activate the frame recording (p. 74).  
2)  
INT. REC *  
ON  
To activate the interval recording function  
(p. 72).  
z OFF  
To deactivate the interval recording function.  
SET  
To set INTERVAL and REC TIME for interval  
recording.  
1)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
(continued on the following page)  
219  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
Notes on the LP mode  
When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing  
back the tape on your camcorder. When you playback the tape recorded on another  
camcorder or VCR, noise may occur in images or sounds.  
When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony cassette so that you  
can get the most out of your camcorder.  
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in  
the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be  
2)  
written properly between scenes.*  
Noise may occur also when you play back on your camcorder tapes recorded in the  
3)  
LP mode on another camcorder or VCR.*  
When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, recording is carried out in  
3)  
the standard 8 mm system.*  
2)  
Note on AUDIO MODE *  
When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance in  
AUDIO MIX.  
4)  
Note on dubbing a tape to another VCR *  
You cannot select AUDIO MODE for tapes recorded in the Digital8 system. You,  
however, can select AUDIO MODE when you dub tapes recorded in the Hi8  
standard 8 mm system to another VCR using the i.LINK cable.  
/
3)  
Notes on ORC setting *  
Each time you eject the cassette, the ORC setting will be canceled. If necessary, set the  
setting.  
You cannot use this setting on a tape with the red mark on the cassette exposed.  
(i. e. the tape is write-protected)  
When you set ORC TO SET, a non-recorded section of about 0.1 seconds appears on  
the tape. However, note that this non-recorded section disappears from the tape when  
you continue recording from this section.  
To check if you have already set the ORC setting, select ORC TO SET in the menu  
settings. ORC ONis displayed if ORC TO SET is already set.  
1)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
220  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch *  
1)  
Icon/item  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
z ON  
OFF  
To set the date or time (p. 26).  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
2)  
AUTO DATE *  
To record the date for 10 seconds after recording CAMERA  
has started.  
To cancel the auto date function.  
3)  
USB STREAM * z OFF  
To deactivate the USB Streaming function.  
To activate the USB Streaming function.  
To display selected menu items in normal size.  
VCR  
CAMERA  
ON  
LTR SIZE  
z NORMAL  
VCR/  
PLAYER  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
2×  
To display selected menu items at twice the  
normal size.  
LANGUAGE  
z ENGLISH  
To display the information indicators in English. VCR/  
PLAYER  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
FRANÇAIS  
To display the some of the information  
indicators in French.  
ESPAÑOL  
To display the some of the information  
indicators in Spanish.  
PORTUGUÊS To display the some of the information  
indicators in Portuguese.  
To display the some of the information  
indicators in Chinese.  
To display the some of the information  
indicators in Korean.  
DEMO MODE  
z ON  
OFF  
To make the demonstration appear.  
To cancel the demonstration mode.  
CAMERA  
Notes on DEMO MODE  
You cannot select DEMO MODE when a Memory Stickis inserted in your  
4)  
camcorder.*  
You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette is inserted in your camcorder.  
The DEMO MODE default setting is STBY (Standby), and the demonstration starts  
about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a  
cassette inserted.  
4)  
To cancel the demonstration, insert a Memory Stick* or a cassette, set the POWER  
switch to anything other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF. To set to STBY  
(Standby) again, leave the DEMO MODE at ON in the menu settings, turn the  
POWER switch to OFF (CHG), and return the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
When NIGHTSHOT is set to ON, NIGHTSHOTappears on the screen and you  
cannot select DEMO MODE in the menu settings.  
1)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
221  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch *  
1)  
Icon/item  
OTHERS  
Mode  
Meaning  
2)  
DATA CODE *  
z DATE/ CAM  
To display date, time and recording data during VCR  
playback.  
MEMORY  
DATE  
To display date and time during playback.  
WORLD TIME  
To set the clock to the local time.  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to set a time  
difference. The clock changes by the time  
difference you set here. If you set the time  
difference to 0, the clock returns to the originally  
set time.  
BEEP  
z MELODY  
To output the melody when you start/ stop  
recording or when an unusual condition occurs  
on your camcorder.  
VCR/  
PLAYER  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
NORMAL  
OFF  
To output the beep instead of the melody.  
To cancel all sound including shutter sound.  
3)  
COMMANDER  
*
z ON  
To activate the Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder.  
VCR/  
PLAYER  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
OFF  
To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid  
erroneous remote control operation caused by  
other VCRs remote control.  
DISPLAY  
z LCD  
V-OUT/ LCD  
z ON  
To show the display on the LCD screen and in  
the viewfinder.  
VCR/  
PLAYER  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
To show the display on the TV screen, LCD  
screen and in the viewfinder.  
REC LAMP  
To light up the camera recording lamp at the  
front of your camcorder.  
CAMERA  
MEMORY  
OFF  
To turn the camera recording lamp off so that  
the person is not aware of the recording.  
1)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
5)  
*
222  
Ch a n g in g t h e m e n u se t t in g s  
POWER  
sw itch *  
1)  
Icon/item  
OTHERS  
VIDEO EDIT  
Mode  
Meaning  
4)  
*
z RETURN  
To cancel video editing.  
VCR  
TAPE  
To make a program and perform video editing  
(p. 106).  
MEMORY  
To make a program and perform MPEG editing  
(p. 156).  
5)  
*
To make a program and perform video editing  
(p. 106).  
VCR  
4)  
Note *  
If you press DISPLAY with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings, the  
picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the screen even when your camcorder is  
connected to outputs on the TV or VCR. (Except when your camcorder is connected  
with the i.LINK cable)  
3)  
After five minutes of removing the pow er source *  
The COMMANDER item returns to their default settings.  
When recording a close subject  
When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamp on the front of the  
camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend that you  
set REC LAMP to OFF.  
1)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
5)  
*
223  
Tro u b le sh o o t in g —  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct  
t ro u b le  
If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to  
troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power source and  
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If C:ss:ss”  
appears on the screen, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 232.  
In t h e re co rd in g m o d e  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Action  
START/ STOP does not operate.  
The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA.  
c Set it to CAMERA (p. 30).  
The tape has run out.  
c Rewind the cassette or insert a new one (p. 28, 45).  
The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark.  
c Use a new tape or slide the tab (p. 29).  
The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 247).  
The power goes off.  
While being operated in CAMERA mode, your camcorder  
has been in the standby mode for more than three  
1)  
2)  
minutes * / five minutes * .  
c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to  
CAMERA again (p. 30).  
The battery pack is dead or nearly dead.  
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 18, 19).  
The image on the viewfinder screen  
is not clear.  
The viewfinder lens is not adjusted.  
c Adjust the viewfinder lens (p. 35).  
The SteadyShot function does not  
work.*  
STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
3)  
c Set it to ON (p. 213).  
1)  
16:9WIDE is set to ON in the menu settings.*  
c Set it to OFF (p. 212).  
16:9WIDE is set to 16:9FULL.*  
2)  
c Set it to OFF (p. 212).  
The autofocusing function does not  
work.  
The setting is the manual focus mode.  
c Set the autofocus mode (p. 71).  
Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus.  
c Adjust to focus manually (p. 71).  
The x indicator flashes in the  
The video heads may be dirty.  
viewfinder.  
c Clean the heads using the Sony V8-25CLD cleaning  
cassette (optional) (p. 248).  
1)  
*
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
224  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Action  
The picture does not appear in the  
viewfinder.  
The LCD panel is open.  
c Close the LCD panel when you do not record using the  
LCD screen (p. 32).  
A vertical band appears when you  
shoot a subject such as lights or a  
candle flame against a dark  
background.  
The contrast between the subject and background is too  
high. This is not a malfunction.  
A vertical band appears when you  
shoot a very bright subject.  
The smear phenomenon is occurring. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Some tiny white, red, blue or green  
spots appear on the screen.*  
Slow shutter, Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter  
mode is activated. This is not a malfunction.  
4)  
An unknown picture is displayed on  
the screen.  
If 10 minutes passes after you set the POWER switch to  
CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu  
settings without a Memory Stick*4) or a cassette  
inserted, your camcorder automatically starts the  
demonstration.  
c Insert a Memory Stick*4) or a cassette and the  
demonstration stops.  
You can also cancel DEMO MODE (p. 221).  
The picture is recorded in incorrect or NIGHTSHOT is set to ON.  
unnatural colors.  
c Set it to OFF (p. 39).  
Picture appears too bright, and the  
subject does not appear on the  
screen.  
NIGHTSHOT is set to ON in a bright place.  
c Set it to OFF (p. 39).  
The backlight function is active.  
c Deactivate the backlight function (p. 38).  
4)  
The shutter does not sound.*  
BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL (p. 222).  
A horizontal black band appears  
when shooting a TV screen or a  
computer screen.*  
Set STEADYSHOT to OFF in the menu settings (p. 213).  
3)  
An external flash (optional) does not  
work.*  
The power of the external flash is off or the power source  
is not installed.  
4)  
c Turn on the external flash or install the power source.  
AUTO is selected in FLASH MODE in the menu settings  
while recording in a bright place.  
c Set it to ON (p. 211).  
1)  
*
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
225  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
In t h e p la yb a ck m o d e  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Action  
The picture does not appear on the  
screen when playing back a tape.*  
• The tape is recorded in the Hi8  
system.  
/ Standard 8 mm  
1)  
The tape does not move when a  
video control button is pressed.  
• The POWER switch is set to MEMORY, CAMERA or OFF  
(CHG).*2)  
c Set it to VCR/ PLAYER *2) (p. 45).  
The playback button does not work.  
• The cassette has run out of tape.  
c Rewind the tape (p. 45).  
There are horizontal lines on the  
picture.  
• The televisions video channel is not adjusted correctly.  
c Adjust it *3) (p. 51).  
The playback picture is not clear or  
does not appear.  
• EDIT is set to ON in the menu settings.  
c Set it to OFF *3) (p. 214).  
• The video head may be dirty.  
c Clean the heads using the Sony V8-25CLD cleaning  
cassette (optional) (p. 248).  
No sound or only a low sound is  
heard when playing back a tape.  
• The stereo tape is played back with HiFi SOUND set to 2  
in the menu settings.*  
4)  
c Set it to STEREO (p. 214).  
• The volume is turned to minimum.  
c Press VOLUME + (p. 45).  
4)  
• AUDIO MIX is set to the ST2 side in the menu settings.*  
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 214).  
The date search does not work  
correctly.*  
• The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions  
(p. 90).  
5)  
The picture which is recorded in the  
• PB MODE is set to  
c Set it to AUTO (p. 215).  
c Set PB MODE to  
/
in the menu settings.  
6)  
Digital8  
The tape which is recorded in the  
Hi8 / standard 8 mm system  
is not played back correctly.*  
system is not played back.*  
/
in the menu settings (p. 215).  
6)  
4)  
PAL” is displayed on the screen.*  
• The TV color system recorded on the tape is different from  
that of your camcorder.  
1)  
*
2)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
3)  
*
4)  
*
5)  
*
6)  
*
226  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
In t h e re co rd in g a n d p la yb a ck m o d e s  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Action  
Your camcorder does not function  
even when the POWER switch is set  
to a position other than OFF (CHG).  
The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.  
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 18, 19).  
The AC Adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet.  
c Connect the AC Adaptor to a wall outlet (p. 24).  
The end search function does not  
work.  
The tape was ejected after recording.  
You have not recorded on the new cassette yet.  
The end search function does not  
work correctly.  
The tape has a blank portion at the beginning or midway.  
The battery pack is quickly  
discharged.  
The operating temperature is too low.  
The battery pack is not charged enough.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 19).  
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be  
recharged.  
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 18).  
The remaining battery time indicator You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or  
does not indicate the correct time.  
cold environment for a long time.  
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be  
recharged.  
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 18).  
The battery is dead.  
c Use a fully charged battery pack (p. 18, 19).  
A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.  
c Charge the battery pack fully so that the remaining  
battery time indicator indicates correct time (p. 19).  
The power goes off although the  
remaining battery time indicator  
indicates that the battery pack has  
enough power to operate.  
A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.  
c Charge the battery pack fully so that the remaining  
battery time indicator indicates correct time (p. 19).  
The cassette cannot be removed from The power source is disconnected.  
the holder.  
c Connect it firmly (p. 18, 24).  
The battery is dead.  
c Use a charged battery pack (p. 18, 19).  
The % and Z indicators flash and no  
functions except for cassette ejection  
work.  
Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 247).  
The remaining tape indicator is not  
displayed.  
The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape  
indicator.  
227  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Wh e n o p e ra t in g u sin g t h e Me m o ry St ick”  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Action  
The POWER switch is not set to MEMORY.  
c Set it to MEMORY (p. 132).  
The Memory Stickdoes not  
function.  
The Memory Stickis not inserted.  
c Insert a Memory Stick(p. 127).  
The Memory Stickis full.  
Recording does not function.  
c Delete unnecessary images and record again (p. 177).  
The Memory Stickformatted incorrectly is inserted.  
c Format the Memory Stickon your camcorder or use  
another Memory Stick(p. 127, 218).  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 240).  
The image is protected.  
An image cannot be deleted.  
c Cancel image protection (p. 176).  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 240).  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
You cannot format a Memory  
LOCK.  
Stick.”  
c Release the lock (p. 240).  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
Deleting all the images cannot be  
carried out.  
c Release the lock (p. 240).  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
You cannot protect an image.  
c Release the lock (p. 240).  
The image to protect is not played back.  
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image (p. 163).  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
You cannot write a print mark on a  
still image.  
c Release the lock (p. 240).  
The image to write a print mark to is not played back.  
c Press MEMORY PLAY to play back the image (p. 163).  
You are trying to write a print mark on a moving picture.  
c Print marks cannot be written on a moving picture.  
You may not be able to play back images in actual size  
when you try to play back images recorded by other  
equipment. This is not a malfunction.  
You cannot play back images in  
actual size.  
Folders/ files renamed or images processed with your  
computer may not be played back. (The file name will  
blink.)  
You cannot play back image data.  
If you record images with any other equipment, the  
images may not play back normally on your camcorder.  
228  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Ot h e rs  
Symptom  
Easy Dubbing does not function.*  
Cause and/or Corrective Action  
1)  
Your VCR and/ or video camera recorder is not set  
correctly.  
c Make sure the input selector of the VCR is set to LINE.  
Also, make sure the power switch of the video camera is  
set to VTR/ VCR (p. 99).  
The IR SETUP code or PAUSE MODE is not set correctly.  
c Select the correct IR SETUP code and PAUSE MODE,  
according to your VCR. Then confirm VCR operation  
with the IR TEST function (p. 99).  
Digital program editing to a tape  
does not function.*  
The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly.  
c Check the connection and set the input selector on the  
VCR again (p. 107).  
2)  
Your camcorder is connected to DV equipment of other  
than Sony using the i.LINK cable.  
c Set it to IR (p. 107).  
You have attempted to set a program on a blank portion of  
the tape.  
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 115).  
Your camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized.  
c Adjust the synchronization (p. 113).  
The IR SETUP code is incorrect.  
c Set the correct code (p. 101).  
3)  
PB MODE is set to  
/
in the menu settings.*  
c Set it to AUTO (p. 215).  
Digital program editing to a  
Memory Stickdoes not function.*  
Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is  
attempted.  
3)  
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 156).  
The Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder does not  
work.*  
COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 222).  
Something is blocking the infrared rays.  
4)  
c Remove the obstacle.  
The batteries are inserted with + and incorrectly  
matching + and inside the battery compartment.  
c Insert the batteries correctly (p. 264).  
The batteries are dead.  
c Insert new ones (p. 264).  
1)  
*
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
5)  
*
(continued on the following page)  
229  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Action  
DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings.  
c Set it to LCD (p. 222).  
The picture from a TV or VCR does  
not appear on the screen even when  
your camcorder is connected to the  
outputs of other equipment  
3)  
(connected with the A/ V cable).*  
Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Eject the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least  
one hour to acclimatize (p. 247).  
The melody or beep sounds for five  
seconds.  
Some trouble has occurred in your camcorder.  
c Eject the cassette and insert it again, then operate your  
camcorder.  
The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).  
You cannot charge the battery pack.  
c Set it to OFF (CHG).  
The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).  
c Set it to OFF (CHG).  
The BATTERY INFO is not  
displayed.  
The battery pack is not installed properly.  
c Install it properly (p. 18).  
The battery pack is fully discharged.  
c Install a fully charged battery pack.  
c Disconnect the power cord of the AC Adaptor or  
remove the battery, then reconnect it in about one  
minute. Turn the power on. If the functions still do not  
work, open the LCD panel and press the RESET button  
using a sharp-pointed object. (If you press the RESET  
button, all the settings including the date and time  
return to their defaults.) (p. 258)  
No function works though the power  
is on.  
5)  
Your camcorder was connected to your computer with the  
USB cable before installing the USB driver, so the driver  
was not recognized by the computer.  
You cannot install the USB driver.*  
c Uninstall the unrecognized driver, and then reinstall the  
driver (p. 194).  
1)  
*
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
5)  
*
230  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Action  
5)  
USB Streaming does not work.*  
The USB driver is not installed correctly.  
c Uninstall the unrecognized driver, and then reinstall the  
driver (p. 194).  
Your computers operating system is Windows 98 or  
earlier.  
USB STREAM is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON.  
USB Streaming does not work when:  
you record MPEG movie on a Memory Stick.*  
you record a photo on a Memory Stick.*  
3)  
3)  
Image data cannot be transferred by  
the USB connection.*  
The USB cable was connected before installation of the  
USB driver was completed.  
5)  
c Uninstall the incorrect USB driver and reinstall the USB  
driver (p. 194).  
The cassette cannot be removed even Moisture has started to condense in your camcorder  
if the cassette lid is open.  
(p. 247).  
1)  
*
2)  
*
3)  
*
4)  
*
5)  
*
231  
Se lf-d ia g n o sis d isp la y  
Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display  
function.  
LCD scre e n o r vie w fin d e r  
C:21:00  
This function displays the current state of your  
camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of a  
letter and numbers) on the screen.  
If a 5-digit code is displayed, check the following  
list of codes. The last two digits (indicated by ss)  
differ depending on the state of your camcorder.  
Self-diagnosis display  
C:ss:ss  
You can service your camcorder  
yourself.  
E:ss:ss  
Contact your Sony dealer or local  
authorized Sony service facility.  
5-digit display  
Cause and/or Corrective Action  
You are using a battery pack that is not an  
C:04:ss  
InfoLITHIUMbattery pack.  
c Use an InfoLITHIUMbattery pack (p. 21, 242).  
C:21:ss  
Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Eject the cassette and leave your camcorder for at least  
one hour to acclimatize (p. 247).  
C:22:ss  
The video heads are dirty.  
c Clean the heads using the Sony V8-25CLD cleaning  
cassette (optional) (p. 248).  
C:31:ss  
A malfunction other than the above that you can service  
has occurred.  
c Eject the cassette and insert it again, then operate your  
camcorder.  
C:32:ss  
c Disconnect the power cord of the AC Adaptor or  
remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power  
source, operate your camcorder.  
E:20:ss  
E:61:ss  
E:62:ss  
A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.  
c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony  
service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code.  
(e.g. E:61:10)  
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions several times,  
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.  
232  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s  
If indicators and messages appear on the screen, check the following.  
See the page in parentheses “( )” for more information.  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs  
101–0001  
C:21:00  
Tape/Battery pack w arning indicator  
Slow flashing:  
• The battery pack is nearly dead.  
• The tape is near the end.  
Fast flashing:  
• The battery pack is dead.  
• The tape has run out.*  
101-0001 Warning indicator as to file  
% Moisture condensation has occurred *  
Fast flashing:  
• Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder,  
and leave it for about one hour with the  
cassette compartment open (p. 247).  
Slow flashing:  
• The file is corrupted.  
• The file is unreadable.  
• You are trying to use the MEMORY MIX  
function on a moving picture (p. 140).  
Q Warning indicator as to tape  
Slow flashing:  
• The remaining tape becomes shorter than  
the length for five-minute recording.  
No tape is inserted.*  
• The write-protect tab on the cassette is set  
to LOCK (red) * (p. 29).  
C:21:00 Self-diagnosis display (p. 232)  
E Warning indicator as to battery  
Slow flashing:  
• The battery is nearly dead.  
The E indicator sometimes flashes even if  
the remaining battery time is about five to  
10 minutes depending on the operating  
conditions, environment and battery  
condition.  
Fast flashing:  
• The cassette has run out of tape.*  
Warning indicator as to incompatible  
“Memory Stick”*  
Fast flashing:  
Slow flashing:  
• An incompatible “Memory Stick” is  
inserted.  
• The battery pack is dead.  
• The battery pack is completely dead, and  
cannot be charged.  
* You hear the melody or beep.  
233  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s  
Z You need to eject the cassette *  
Slow flashing:  
- The image is protected *  
Slow flashing:  
• The write-protect tab on the cassette is set  
to LOCK (red) (p. 29).  
• The image is protected (p. 176).  
Warning indicator as to the flash  
(optional)  
Fast flashing:  
Fast flashing:  
• Moisture condensation has occurred  
(p. 247).  
• There is something wrong with the external  
flash. (optional)  
• The cassette has run out of tape.  
• The self-diagnosis display function is  
activated (p. 232).  
Warning indicator as to still image  
recording  
Slow flashing:  
Warning indicator as to “Memory  
Stick”  
• The still image cannot be recorded on the  
Slow flashing:  
“Memory Stick”  
• The still image cannot be recorded on the  
tepe (p. 56).  
(p. 53).  
No “Memory Stick” is inserted.  
Fast flashing *:  
• The “Memory Stick” is not readable on  
your camcorder (p. 126).  
• The image cannot be recorded on a  
“Memory Stick.”  
* You hear the melody or beep.  
Warning indicator as to “Memory Stick”  
formatting *  
Fast flashing:  
• “Memory Stick” data is corrupted (p. 240).  
• “Memory Stick” is not formatted correctly  
(p. 218).  
234  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s  
Wa rn in g m e ssa g e s  
CLOCK SET  
Set the date and time (p. 26).  
FOR InfoLITHIUM”  
Use an InfoLITHIUMbattery pack (p. 242).  
BATTERY ONLY  
Q Z TAPE END  
The cassette has run out of tape.*  
Insert a cassette tape.*  
Q NO TAPE  
CLEANING CASSETTE  
The video heads are dirty. (The x indicator and  
CLEANING CASSETTEmessage appear one  
after another on the screen.)* (p. 248)  
COPY INHIBIT  
START/ STOP KEY  
ORC  
You tried to record a picture that has a copyright  
control signal * (p. 238).  
Press START/ STOP to activate the ORC setting. This  
message is displayed in white (p. 219).  
ORC is working. This message is displayed in white  
(p. 219).  
NOW CHARGING  
Charging an external flash (optional) does not work  
correctly.*  
* You hear the melody or beep.  
235  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s  
Wa rn in g m e ssa g e s a s t o “ Me m o ry St ick”  
You hear the melody or beep.  
FULL  
The “Memory Stick” is full (p. 131).  
FOLDER NO. FULL  
Folders have already been created in the “Memory  
Stick” up to the limit (up to the folder 999 MSDCF)  
(p. 161).  
-
The write-protect tab on the “Memory Stick” is set to  
LOCK (p. 240).  
NO FILE  
No still image is recorded on the “Memory Stick.”  
No “Memory Stick” is inserted.  
NO MEMORY STICK  
AUDIO ERROR  
You are trying to record an image with sound that  
cannot be recorded by your camcorder on “Memory  
Stick” (p. 151).  
MEMORY STICK ERROR  
FORMAT ERROR  
The “Memory Stick” data is corrupted (p. 127).  
Check the type of the “Memory Stick” format  
(p. 218).  
PLAY ERROR  
REC ERROR  
The image cannot be played back.  
Reinsert the “Memory Stick,” then play back the  
image again.  
Check the input signal before retrying recording  
(p. 139, 153).  
INCOMPATIBLE  
MEMORY STICK  
The “Memory Stick” inserted is not compatible with  
your camcorder.  
• DELETING  
You have pressed PHOTO during deleting all images  
on “Memory Stick.”  
• FORMATTING  
NO FILE AVAILABLE  
You have pressed PHOTO during formatting a  
“Memory Stick.”  
No file is in the current PB folder (p. 169).  
• USB STREAMING ON GOING You cannot carry out any “Memory Stick” operations  
during USB Streaming (p. 200).  
• READ-ONLY MEMORY  
STICK  
The 100MSDCF is only for playback (p. 162).  
236  
Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n —  
Ab o u t vid e o ca sse t t e  
Usa b le ca sse t t e t a p e s a n d Re co rd in g / Pla yb a ck syst e m s  
1)  
Usable cassette tapes  
Recording system  
Hi8  
/ Digital8 (recommended) Standard 8 mm  
*
Digital8  
Digital8  
2)  
Playback system *  
Hi8  
Standard 8 mm  
1)  
Usable cassette tapes  
Recording system  
Playback system  
Hi8  
/ Digital8 (recommended) Standard 8 mm  
*
Digital8  
Digital8  
Usable cassette tapes  
Recording system  
Hi8  
Hi8  
Hi8  
Standard 8 mm  
Standard 8 mm  
Standard 8 mm  
3)  
*
2)  
Playback system *  
1)  
* If you use standard 8 mm tape, be sure to play back the tape on your camcorder.  
Mosaic noise may appear when you play back standard 8 mm tape on other VCRs  
(including another DCR-TRV150/ TRV250/ TRV350/ TRV351).  
2)  
* When you play back a tape, the Hi8  
system or standard 8 mm system is  
automatically detected and the playback system automatically switches to.  
3)  
* If you record on a Hi8  
video cassette in the LP mode, recording is carried out in  
the standard 8 mm system.  
Wh a t is t h e Dig it a l8  
This video system has been developed to enable digital recording to Hi8  
Digital8 video cassette.  
syst e m ?  
/
The recording time when you use your Digital8 system camcorder on Hi8  
/
standard 8 mm tape is half the recording time when using the conventional  
Hi8 / standard 8 mm system camcorder. (120 minutes of recording time becomes  
60 minutes in the SP mode.)  
Wh a t is t h e Hi8  
syst e m ?  
This Hi8  
system is an extension of the standard 8 mm system, and was  
developed to produce higher quality pictures.  
You cannot play back a tape recorded in the Hi8  
system correctly on video  
recorders/ players other than a Hi8 video recorder/ player.  
237  
Ab o u t vid e o ca sse t t e  
Co p yrig h t sig n a l  
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck  
If the tape you play back on your camcorder contains copyright signals, you cannot  
copy it with another video camera recorder connected to your camcorder.  
Wh e n yo u re co rd  
You cannot record software on your camcorder that contains copyright control signals  
for copyright protection of software.  
The COPY INHIBIT indicator appears on the LCD screen, in the viewfinder or on the  
TV screen if you try to record such software. Your camcorder does not record copyright  
control signals on the tape when it records.  
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck a d u a l so u n d t ra ck t a p e  
Wh e n yo u u se a t a p e re co rd e d in t h e Dig it a l8  
syst e m  
When you play back a Digital8 system tape which is dubbed from a dual sound track  
tape recorded in the DV system, set HiFi SOUND to the desired mode in the menu  
settings (p. 214).  
Sound from speaker  
HiFi Sound  
Mode  
Playing back  
a stereo tape  
Playing back a dual  
sound track tape  
STEREO  
Stereo  
Lch  
Main sound and sub sound  
Main sound  
1
2
Rch  
Sub sound  
You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.  
Wh e n yo u u se a t a p e re co rd e d in t h e Hi8  
syst e m  
/st a n d a rd 8 m m  
When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in an AFM HiFi stereo system,  
set HiFi SOUND to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 214).  
Sound from speaker  
HiFi Sound  
Mode  
Playing back  
a stereo tape  
Playing back a dual  
sound track tape  
STEREO  
Stereo  
Main sound and sub sound  
Main sound  
1
2
Monaural  
Unnatural Sound  
Sub sound  
You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.  
238  
Ab o u t vid e o ca sse t t e  
Display during automatic detection of system  
The Digital8 system or Hi8 / standard 8 mm system is automatically detected,  
and the playback system is automatically switched to. During switching of systems, the  
screen turns blue, and the following displays appear on the screen. A hissing noise also  
sometimes can be heard.  
t
/
: During switching from Digital8 to Hi8  
/ standard 8 mm  
/
t
: During switching from Hi8 / standard 8 mm to Digital8  
239  
Ab o u t t h e Me m o ry St ick”  
Memory Stickis a new compact, portable and versatile IC recording medium with a  
data capacity that exceeds the capacity of a floppy disk.  
In addition to exchanging data between Memory Stickcompatible equipment, you  
can also use a Memory Stickto store data as a type of detachable external recording  
media.  
There are two types of Memory Stick: an ordinary Memory Stickand a MagicGate  
Memory Stickthat is equipped with the MagicGate * copyright protection technology.  
You can use both types of Memory Stickwith your camcorder. However, because  
your camcorder does not support the MagicGate standards, data recorded with your  
camcorder is not subject to MagicGate copyright protection.  
In addition, you can also use Memory Stick Duowith your camcorder.  
* MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses encryption technology.  
You cannot record or delete images when the write-protect tab is set to LOCK.  
The position or the shape of the write-protect tab may differ depending on the  
Memory Stickyou use.  
Terminal  
Write-protect  
tab  
Labeling position  
Do not remove the Memory Stickor turn off the camcorder while reading or  
writing data.  
Data may be damaged in a location subject to the effects of static electricity or noise.  
We recommend backing up important data on the hard disk of your computer.  
Do not attach any other material than the supplied label on the labeling position.  
When you carry or store the Memory Stick,put it in the case supplied with it.  
Do not touch the terminal of a Memory Stickwith your hand or a metal object.  
Do not strike, bend or drop a Memory Stick.”  
Do not disassemble or modify a Memory Stick.”  
Do not expose the Memory Stickto water.  
Do not use or keep the Memory Stickunder the following conditions:  
High temperature locations such as in a car parked in direct sunlight  
Locations exposed to direct sunlight  
Humid locations or locations with corrosive substances  
240  
Ab o u t t h e “ Me m o ry St ick”  
No t e s o n u sin g “ Me m o ry St ick Du o ” (o p t io n a l)  
• When using a “Memory Stick Duo” with your camcorder, be sure to insert the  
“Memory Stick Duo” into a Memory Stick Duo Adaptor.  
• Make sure that a “Memory Stick Duo” is inserted facing the proper direction.  
Inserting a “Memory Stick Duo” facing the wrong direction may damage the  
equipment.  
• Do not insert a “Memory Stick Duo” without a Memory Stick Duo Adaptor into  
“Memory Stick” compatible equipment, as this may cause equipment trouble.  
241  
Ab o u t t h e In fo LITHIUMb a t t e ry p a ck  
Wh a t is t h e In fo LITHIUMb a t t e ry p a ck?  
The InfoLITHIUMbattery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for  
communicating information related to operating conditions between your camcorder  
and an AC Adaptor/ charger (optional).  
The InfoLITHIUMbattery pack calculates the power consumption according to the  
operating conditions of your camcorder, and displays the remaining battery time in  
minutes. Estimated operating time and charging completion time are also displayed.  
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your camcorder.  
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C  
to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) until the charge lamp goes off. If you charge the battery outside  
of this temperature range, you may not be able to efficiently charge the battery.  
After charging is completed, either disconnect the cable from the DC IN jack on your  
camcorder or remove the battery pack.  
Effe ct ive u se o f t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Battery pack performance decreases in low-temperature surroundings. So, the time  
that the battery pack can be used is shorter in cold places. We recommend the  
following to ensure longer battery pack use:  
Put the battery pack in a pocket to warm it up, and insert it in your camcorder  
immediately before you start taking shots.  
Use the large-capacity battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM90/ FM91/  
QM91/ QM91D, optional).  
Frequently using the LCD panel or frequently operating playback, fast-forward or  
rewind wears out the battery pack faster. We recommend using the large-capacity  
battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ QM71D/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91/ QM91D, optional).  
Be sure to turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) when not taking shots or playing  
back on your camcorder. The battery pack is also consumed when your camcorder is  
in the standby mode or playback is paused.  
Have spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected recording time,  
and make a trial recordings before taking the actual recording.  
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.  
Re m a in in g b a t t e ry t im e in d ica t o r  
If the power goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that the  
battery pack has enough power to operate, charge the battery pack fully again so that  
the indication on the remaining battery time indicator is correct. Note, however, that  
the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high  
temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is  
frequently used. Regard the remaining battery time indication as the approximate  
shooting time.  
The E mark indicating that there is little remaining battery time sometimes flashes  
depending on the operating conditions or ambient temperature and environment even  
if the remaining battery time is about five to 10 minutes.  
242  
Ab o u t t h e In fo LITHIUMb a t t e ry p a ck  
Ho w t o st o re t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
If the battery pack is not used for a long time, do the following procedure once per  
year to maintain proper function.  
1. Fully charge the battery.  
2. Discharge on your electronic equipment.  
3. Remove the battery from the equipment and store it in a dry, cool place.  
To use the battery pack up on your camcorder, leave your camcorder in the standby  
mode until the power goes off without a cassette inserted.  
Ba t t e ry life  
The battery life is limited. Battery capacity drops little by little as you use it more and  
more, and as time passes. When the available battery time is shortened considerably,  
a probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Buy a new  
battery pack.  
The battery life varies according to how it is stored, operating conditions and  
environment for each battery pack.  
243  
Ab o u t i.LINK  
The DV jack on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant DV jack. This section describes the  
i.LINK standard and its features.  
Wh a t is i.LINK?  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other  
data in two directions between equipment having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling  
other equipment.  
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible  
applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment.  
When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to this unit in a daisy  
chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that  
this unit is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected  
equipment.  
Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the  
characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected, and that operations  
and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment.  
Note  
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected to this unit by the i.LINK  
cable. When connecting this unit to i.LINK-compatible equipment having two or more  
i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), refer to the operating instructions of the equipment to be  
connected.  
Ab o u t t h e n a m e i.LINK”  
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by Sony, and  
is a trademark approved by many corporations.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronic Engineers.  
i.LINK b a u d ra t e  
i.LINKs maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment. Three maximum baud  
rates are defined:  
S100 (approx. 100 Mbps*)  
S200 (approx. 200 Mbps)  
S400 (approx. 400 Mbps)  
The baud rate is listed under Specificationsin the operating instructions of each  
equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some equipment.  
The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is  
S100.”  
When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the  
baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.  
* What is Mbps?  
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that can be sent or received  
in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100 megabits of data  
can be sent in one second.  
244  
Ab o u t i.LINK  
i.LINK fu n ct io n s o n t h is u n it  
For details on how to dub when this unit is connected to other video equipment having  
DV jacks, see page 96 and 121.  
This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK (DV) compatible non-video equipment  
made by Sony (e.g. VAIO series computer).  
Before connecting this unit to a computer, make sure that application software  
supported by this unit is already installed on the computer.  
For details on precautions when connecting this unit, also refer to the operating  
instructions of the equipment to be connected.  
Re q u ire d i.LINK ca b le  
Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during DV dubbing).  
245  
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d  
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d  
You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC Adaptor supplied with  
your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz.  
When charging the battery pack, use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a ], if  
necessary, depending on the design of the wall outlet [b ].  
AC-L15A/L15B  
[a ]  
[b ]  
Your camcorder is an NTSC system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback  
picture on a TV, it must be an NTSC system based TV with VIDEO/ AUDIO input jack.  
The following shows TV color systems used overseas.  
NTSC system  
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Jamaica,  
Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A., Venezuela,  
etc.  
PAL system  
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,  
Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway,  
Poland, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand,  
United Kingdom etc.  
PAL-M system  
Brazil  
PAL-N system  
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay  
SECAM system  
Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.  
Sim p le se t t in g o f clo ck b y t im e d iffe re n ce  
You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select WORLD  
TIME in the menu settings. See page 222 for more information.  
246  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d  
p re ca u t io n s  
Mo ist u re co n d e n sa t io n  
If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may  
condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this state,  
the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not  
operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep sounds and the  
% indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is  
inserted in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not  
appear.  
If m o ist u re co n d e n sa t io n h a s o ccu rre d  
None of the functions except cassette ejection (  
OPEN/ EJECT) work while the alarm  
indicator is on. Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder, and leave it for about one  
hour with the cassette compartment open. Your camcorder can be used again if the %  
indicator does not flash.  
Note on moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm  
place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:  
– You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by a heating  
device.  
– You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place  
outside.  
– You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower.  
– You use your camcorder in a place of high temperature or humidity.  
How to prevent moisture condensation  
When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your  
camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature  
inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour).  
247  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n  
Cle a n in g t h e vid e o h e a d s  
To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads.  
If the below problem [a ], [b ] or [c] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the  
Sony V8-25CLD cleaning cassette (optional). Check the picture and if the above problem  
persists, repeat cleaning.  
If the video heads get dirtier, the entire screen becomes blue [c].  
When you playback/record in the Digital8  
system  
The video heads may be dirty when:  
Mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture.  
Playback pictures do not move.  
Playback pictures are hardly visible.  
Playback pictures do not appear.  
The x indicator and CLEANING CASSETTEmessage appear one after another.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
When you play back in the Hi8  
/Standard 8 mm system  
The video heads may be dirty when:  
The x indicator and CLEANING CASSETTEmessage appear one after another  
on the screen or the x indicator flashes on the screen.  
Playback pictures contain noise.  
Playback pictures are hardly visible.  
Playback pictures do not appear.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
Cle a n in g t h e LCD scre e n  
If fingerprints or dust makes the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using the LCD  
Cleaning Kit (optional) to clean the LCD screen.  
248  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Notes  
• Store your camcorder with the cassette removed from it when you do not use it for  
an extended period of time.  
• Clean the heads with an optional head cleaner (cleaning cassette) before important  
recording or when playback image or sound is distorted.  
• When the playback pictures still contain noise even if you have cleaned the video  
heads with a cleaning cassette, the video heads may have worn down due to long use.  
If this is the case, they must be replaced with new heads. Contact your Sony dealer or  
local authorized Sony service facility.  
Ch a rg in g t h e b u ilt -in re ch a rg e a b le b a t t e ry  
Your camcorder is supplied with a built-in rechargeable battery installed to retain the  
date and time, etc., regardless of the setting of the POWER switch. The built-in  
rechargeable battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The  
battery, however, will become discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder.  
It will be completely discharged in about three months if you do not use your  
camcorder at all. Even if the built-in rechargeable battery is not charged, it will not  
affect camcorder operation. To retain the date, time, and other information, charge the  
battery if the battery is discharged.  
Charging the built-in rechargeable battery:  
– Connect your camcorder to wall outlet using the AC Adaptor supplied with your  
camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the POWER switch turned off for more  
than 24 hours.  
– Or, install a fully charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder  
with the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) for more than 24 hours.  
Pre ca u t io n s  
Ca m co rd e r o p e ra t io n  
• Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC Adaptor).  
• For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in these operating  
instructions.  
• If any solid object or liquid gets inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it  
checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.  
• Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.  
• Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder.  
• Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so  
might cause heat to build up inside.  
• Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.  
• Do not touch the LCD screen with your fingers or a sharp-pointed object.  
• If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the screen.  
This is not a malfunction.  
• While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a  
malfunction.  
249  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Bu ilt -in lig h t  
Do not knock or jolt the built-in light while it is turned on as it may damage the bulb  
or shorten the life of the bulb.  
Do not leave the built-in light on while it is resting on or against something; it may  
cause a fire or damage the built-in light.  
On h a n d lin g t a p e s  
Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are  
used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.  
Do not open the tape protect cover or touch the tape.  
Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with  
a soft cloth.  
Ca m co rd e r ca re  
Remove the tape, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and  
1)  
VCR/ PLAYER sections and play back a tape for a certain period * when your  
2)  
camcorder is not to be used for a long time.*  
Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens,  
remove them with a soft cloth.  
Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with  
a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the  
finish.  
Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy  
beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause  
your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.  
Co n n e ct io n t o yo u r co m p u t e r  
When inputting the image recorded by Hi8  
/standard 8 mm system into  
Sony VAIO  
The Program Capture function of DVgate motion does not work. To use this function,  
dub the image into a Digital8 or DV tape first, and then input it into your Sony VAIO.  
Co n n e ct io n t o yo u r co m p u t e r  
When recording an image processed or edited by your computer with the i.LINK cable,  
use a new Hi8  
/ Digital8 tape.  
1)  
* three minutes:  
five minutes:  
2)  
* Modes on the POWER switch vary depending on models (p. 16).  
250  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
AC Ad a p t o r  
Unplug the unit from the wall outlet when you are not using it for a long time. To  
disconnect the power cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord itself.  
Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or  
damaged.  
Do not bend the power cord forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage  
the cord and may cause fire or electric shock.  
Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the  
connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.  
Always keep metal contacts clean.  
Do not disassemble the unit.  
Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.  
While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers  
and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and  
video operation.  
The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.  
Do not place the unit in locations that are:  
Extremely hot or cold  
Dusty or dirty  
Very humid  
Vibrating  
Ab o u t ca re a n d st o ra g e o f t h e le n s  
Wipe the surface of the lens clean with a soft cloth in the following instances:  
When there are fingerprints on the lens surface  
In hot or humid locations  
When the lens is used in environments susceptible to salt such as the seaside  
Store the lens in a well-ventilated location subject to little dirt or dust.  
To prevent mold from occurring, periodically perform the above.  
We recommend turning on and operating your camcorder about once per month to  
keep your camcorder in an optimum state for a long time.  
Re ch a rg e a b le Ba t t e ry Pa ck  
Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function.  
To prevent accidental short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into contact  
with the rechargeable battery terminals.  
Keep the Rechargeable Battery Pack away from fire.  
Never expose the Rechargeable Battery Pack to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such  
as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.  
Keep the Rechargeable Battery Pack in a cool, dry place.  
Do not expose the Rechargeable Battery Pack to any mechanical shock.  
Do not disassemble or modify the Rechargeable Battery Pack.  
Attach the Rechargeable Battery Pack to the video equipment securely.  
Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.  
251  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
No t e s o n d ry b a t t e rie s  
To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:  
Be sure to insert the batteries with the + and correctly matching the + and inside  
the battery compartment.  
Dry batteries are not rechargeable.  
Do not use a combination of new and old batteries.  
Do not use different types of batteries.  
Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time.  
Do not use leaking batteries.  
If batteries are leaking  
Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.  
If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.  
If the liquid gets into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a  
doctor.  
If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.  
252  
Sp e cifica t io n s  
Vid e o ca m e ra re co rd e r  
System  
Video  
recording  
system  
2 rotary heads  
Helical scanning  
FM system  
2 rotary heads  
Helical scanning system  
Audio  
recording  
system  
Rotary heads, FM system  
Rotary heads, PCM system  
Quantization: 12bits (Fs 32 kHz, stereo 1, stereo 2), 16bits  
(Fs 48 kHz, stereo)  
Video signal  
NTSC color, EIA standards  
8 mm video format cassette  
Usable cassette  
Recording/  
SP mode: 2 hours  
LP mode: 4 hours  
SP mode: 1 hour  
LP mode: 1 hour and 30 minutes  
playback time  
(using 120 min.  
Hi8/Digital8  
video cassette)  
Fastforw ard/  
rew ind time  
Approx. 5 min.  
(using 120 min.  
Hi8/Digital8  
video cassette)  
View finder  
Electric Viewfinder (monochrome)  
3 mm (1/ 6 type) CCD (Charge Coupled Device)  
Gross: Approx. 460 000 pixels  
Effective: Approx. 290 000 pixels  
Image device  
3 mm (1/ 6 type) CCD  
(Charge Coupled Device)  
Gross:  
Approx. 320 000 pixels  
Effective:  
Approx. 200 000 pixels  
Lens  
Combined power zoom lens  
Filter diameter 37 mm (1 7/ 16 in.)  
20× (Optical), 560× (Digital)  
20× (Optical), 700× (Digital)  
Focal length  
f = 2.5 - 50 mm (1/ 8 - 2 in.)  
When converted to a 35 mm still camera  
f = 42 - 840 mm (1 11/ 16 - 33 1/ 8 in.)  
Color  
temperature  
Auto  
Minimum  
illumination  
1 lx (lux) (F 1.6)  
0 lx (lux) (in the NightShot mode)*  
4 lx (lux) (F 1.6)  
* Objects unable to be seen due to the dark can be shot with infrared lighting.  
(continued on the following page)  
253  
Sp e cifica t io n s  
Input/  
output  
connectors  
S video jack  
Output  
Input/ Output  
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 (ohms), unbalanced  
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p, 75 (ohms),  
unbalanced  
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p,  
75 (ohms), unbalanced  
Chrominance signal: 0.286  
Vp-p, 75 (ohms),  
unbalanced  
4-pin mini DIN  
4-pin mini DIN  
Audio/Video  
jack  
Output  
Input/ Output  
AV MINIJACK,  
AV MINIJACK, VIDEO:  
VIDEO: 1 Vp-p, 75 (ohms), unbalanced, sync negative 1 Vp-p, 75 (ohms),  
AUDIO: 327 mV, (at output impedance more than  
47 k(kilohms))  
Input impedance with more than 47 k(kilohms)  
Output impedance with less than 2.2 k(kilohms)  
unbalanced, sync negative  
AUDIO: 327 mV, (at  
output impedance more  
than 47 k(kilohms))  
Input impedance with  
more than 47 k(kilohms)  
Output impedance with  
less than 2.2 k(kilohms)  
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)  
Monaural minijack  
(ø 3.5 mm)  
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)  
RFU DC OUT  
Mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm),  
DC5V  
MIC jack  
DV jack  
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)  
Stereo minijack (ø 2.5 mm)  
4-pin connector  
mini-B  
USB jack  
LANC jack  
Picture  
LCD screen  
General  
6.2 cm (2.5 type), 50.3 × 37.4 mm (2 × 1 1/ 2 in.)  
61 600 (280 × 220)  
Total dot  
number  
123 200 (560 × 220)  
Pow er  
requirements  
7.2 V (Rechargeable Battery Pack)  
8.4 V (AC Adaptor)  
Average pow er During camera recording  
During camera recording  
using LCD  
3.5 W  
During camera recording  
using viewfinder  
2.7 W  
During camera recording  
using LCD  
3.8 W  
During camera recording  
using viewfinder  
2.9 W  
consumption  
(w hen using  
the battery  
pack)  
using LCD  
2.6 W  
During camera recording  
using viewfinder  
1.9 W  
Operating  
temperature  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Recommended  
charging  
10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F)  
temperature  
Storage  
temperature  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
Dimensions  
(approx.)  
89 × 101 × 199 mm (3 5/ 8 × 4 × 7 7/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
800 g (1 lb 12 oz) (main  
unit only)  
810 g (1 lb 12 oz) (main  
unit only)  
830 g (1 lb 13 oz)  
(main unit only)  
940 g (2 lb 1 oz)  
(including the  
950 g (2 lb 1 oz)  
(including the  
970 g (2 lb 2 oz)  
(including the  
Rechargeable Battery Pack Rechargeable Battery Pack Rechargeable Battery Pack  
NP-FM30, Hi8/ Digital8  
cassette, lens cap, and  
shoulder strap)  
NP-FM30, Hi8/ Digital8  
cassette, lens cap, and  
shoulder strap)  
NP-FM30, Hi8/ Digital8  
cassette, lens cap, and  
shoulder strap)  
Supplied  
accessories  
See page 9.  
254  
Sp e cifica t io n s  
AC Ad a p t o r AC-L15A/L15B  
Re ch a rg e a b le Ba t t e ry Pa ck  
NP-FM30  
Pow er  
requirements  
100 - 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz  
0.35 - 0.18 A  
Maximum  
output voltage  
DC 8.4 V  
Current  
consumption  
Output voltage  
Capacity  
DC 7.2 V  
Pow er  
18 W  
5.0 Wh (700 mAh)  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
consumption  
Operating  
Output voltage  
DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the  
operating mode  
temperature  
Dimensions  
(approx.)  
38.2 × 20.5 × 55.6 mm  
(1 9/ 16 × 13/ 16 × 2 1/ 4 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
Operating  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
temperature  
Mass (approx.)  
Type  
65 g (2.3 oz)  
Storage  
–20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
Lithium ion  
temperature  
Dimensions  
(approx.)  
56 × 31 × 100 mm  
(2 1/ 4 × 1 1/ 4 × 4 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
excluding projecting parts  
Me m o ry St ick”  
Mass (approx.)  
190 g (6.7 oz)  
excluding power cord  
Memory  
Flash memory  
8MB: MSA-8A  
Operating  
voltage  
2.7 - 3.6 V  
Pow er  
consumption  
Approx. 45 mA during operation  
Approx. 130 µA in the standby  
mode  
Dimensions  
(approx.)  
50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm  
(2 × 1/ 8 × 7/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
4 g (0.14 oz)  
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.  
255  
Qu ick Re fe re n ce —  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Ca m co rd e r  
5
1
6
7
2
3
8
9
0
4
1 Lens cap (p. 30)  
6 BATT (battery) release lever (p. 18)  
2 LCD screen (p. 30)  
7 POWER sw itch (p. 30)  
8 START/STOP button (p. 30)  
9 Hooks for shoulder strap  
0 DC IN jack (p. 19)  
3 OPEN button (p. 30)  
4 VOLUME /+ * button (p. 45)  
5 Rechargeable Battery Pack (p. 18)  
* This button has a tactile dot.  
Attaching the shoulder strap  
Attach the shoulder strap supplied with your camcorder to the hooks for the shoulder  
strap.  
256  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
LIGHT BATT INFO REW  
PLAY  
REC  
FF  
qk  
ql  
COLOR SLOW S  
SUPER NS  
qa  
qs  
qd  
qf  
STOP  
PAUSE  
w;  
wa  
ws  
wd  
qg  
qh  
wf  
qj  
2)  
qa BATT INFO (p. 20)  
qk Video control buttons * (p. 45, 49)  
x STOP (stop)  
1)  
qs SUPER NS/COLOR SLOW S button *  
m REW (rewind)  
(p. 39)  
N PLAY (playback)  
M FF (fast-forward)  
X PAUSE (pause)  
qd LIGHT button (p. 79)  
qf Lens  
2) 3)  
ql Rec buttons * *  
qg Microphone  
z REC (recording)  
qh Camera recording lamp (p. 30)  
qj Infrared rays emitter (p. 39)  
w; NIGHTSHOT sw itch (p. 39)  
2)  
wa FADER button * (p. 61)  
ws BACK LIGHT button (p. 38)  
wd FOCUS button (p. 71)  
4)  
wf Remote sensor *  
1)  
*
2)  
* This button has a tactile dot.  
3)  
*
4)  
*
257  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
MEMORY  
MIX  
MEMORY  
PLAY  
DELETE MPEG  
INDEX  
wj  
wk  
wl  
e;  
wg  
wh  
wg RESET button (p. 230)  
wk DISPLAY button (p. 47)  
1) 2)  
1)  
wh EDITSEARCH button * * (p. 43)  
wl MENU button * (p. 210)  
2)  
wj MEMORY operation buttons *  
e; SEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 210)  
MEMORY PLAY button (p. 163)  
MEMORY button (p. 163)  
MEMORY + button (p. 163)  
MEMORY MIX button (p. 141)  
MEMORY DELETE button (p. 177)  
MPEG NX button (p. 166)  
MEMORY INDEX button (p. 165)  
Attaching the lens cap  
Attach the lens cap to the grip strap as illustrated.  
1)  
* This button has a tactile dot.  
2)  
*
258  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
CCD-TRV418  
ea  
es  
ed  
ea DATE button * (p. 42)  
es TIME button * (p. 42)  
ed COUNTER RESET button * (p. 31)  
*
259  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
ef  
el  
eg  
eh  
r;  
ra  
ej  
rs  
rd  
ek  
3)  
ef Pow er zoom lever (p. 34)  
el PHOTO button * (p. 53, 56, 132)  
1)  
eg EXPOSURE button (p. 70)  
r; “Memory Stick” slot * (p. 127)  
1)  
1)  
eh PB ZOOM button * (p. 87, 172)  
ra  
Access lamp * (p. 127)  
2)  
EASY DUB button * (p. 98)  
rs CHG lamp (p. 19)  
ej Speaker  
rd END SEARCH button (p. 43, 49)  
ek TITLE button (p. 75)  
1)  
*
2)  
*
3)  
*
260  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
rf  
rg  
rj  
rk  
rh  
rf View finder (p. 35)  
rg LOCK sw itch * (p. 30)  
rh Grip strap  
rk  
LANC jack (blue) *  
LANC stands for Local Application  
Control Bus System. The LANC control  
jack is used for controlling the tape  
transport of video equipment and other  
peripherals connected to the video  
equipment. This jack has the same  
function as the jack indicated as  
CONTROL L or REMOTE.  
rj MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack (red) *  
Connect an external microphone  
(optional). This jack also accepts a  
plug-in-powermicrophone.  
Fastening the grip strap  
Fasten the grip strap firmly.  
*
261  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
ta  
rl  
t;  
ts  
td  
rl Eyecup  
ts Tripod receptacle (base)  
Make sure that the length of the tripod  
screw is less than 5.5 mm (7/ 32 in.).  
Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod  
securely and the screw may damage  
your camcorder.  
t; View finder lens adjustment lever  
(p. 35)  
ta  
OPEN/EJECT sw itch (p. 28)  
td Cassette compartment (p. 28)  
262  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
th  
tj  
tf  
tg  
tk tl y;  
1)  
2)  
tf S VIDEO or S VIDEO OUT jack *  
tj (USB) jack * (p. 183, 185)  
(p. 51, 94, 119, 138, 152, 208)  
3)  
tk S VIDEO OUT * (p. 51, 95)  
1)  
tg AUDIO/VIDEO or A/V OUT jack *  
3)  
tl A/V OUT * (p. 51, 95)  
(p. 51, 94, 119, 138, 152, 208)  
3)  
y; RFU DC OUT * (p. 52)  
1)  
th DV jack *  
(p. 96, 121, 139, 153, 184, 208)  
The DV jack is i.LINK compatible.  
1)  
*
2)  
*
3)  
*
263  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
The buttons that share the same name on the Remote Commander and your camcorder  
function identically.  
6
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
8
q;  
8
9
0
5
2
RMT-814  
RMT-708  
1 PHOTO button (p. 53, 56, 132)  
2 DISPLAY button (p. 47)  
7 ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 89, 124)  
8 START/STOP button (p. 30)  
9 DATA CODE button (p. 47)  
3 SEARCH MODE button (p. 90, 92)  
4 ./> buttons (p. 90, 92)  
5 Video control buttons (p. 45, 49)  
0 Pow er zoom button (p. 34)  
6 Transmitter  
Point toward the remote sensor to  
control the camcorder after turning on  
the camcorder.  
To p re p a re t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
Insert 2 size AA (R6) batteries by matching the + and polarities on the batteries to  
the + marks inside the battery compartment.  
RMT-708  
RMT-814  
Notes on the Remote Commander  
Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or  
overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.  
Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. The commander modes  
1, 2 and 3 are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid  
unintentional operations. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode  
VTR 2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the  
VCR with black paper.  
264  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Op e ra t io n in d ica t o rs  
LCD scre e n a n d Vie w fin d e r  
1
qd  
qf  
qg  
qh  
2
SP  
0:00:00  
REC  
50min  
3
W
T
M.FADER  
16:9WIDE  
SEPIA  
4
5
6
7
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
DATE 01  
SEARCH  
qj  
qk  
ql  
w;  
wa  
A/V DV  
16B I T  
1 0 1 0 0 0  
1
8
9
q;  
qa  
qs  
ws  
wd  
wf  
1 Recording mode (p. 36)  
Mirror mode  
qa SteadyShot off  
(p. 213)  
(p. 35)  
qs Manual focusing (p. 71)  
2 Format (p. 36)  
,
or indicator appears.  
qd Self-timer indicator  
(p. 41, 55, 135, 149)  
3 Remaining battery time (p. 36)  
4 Zoom (p. 34)  
qf STBY/REC (p. 30)  
Video control mode (p. 49)  
Exposure (p. 70)  
Image size  
(p. 130)  
(p. 128)  
5 Fader (p. 61)  
Image quality  
Digital effect  
(p. 65, 85)  
(p. 140)  
qg Tape counter (p. 36)  
MEMORY MIX  
Time code  
(p. 36)  
6 Wide mode (p. 58)  
FRAME indicator  
(p. 132)  
(p. 47)  
Self-diagnosis display (p. 232)  
7 Picture effect (p. 64, 83)  
8 Volume (p. 45)  
Data code  
Tape Photo recording  
(p. 56)  
Memory Photo recording  
(p. 132)  
9 PROGRAM AE (p. 68)  
0 Backlight (p. 38)  
Image number  
(p. 164)  
265  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
qh Remaining tape (p. 36)  
w; A/V t DV  
DV IN  
(p. 208)  
(p. 122)  
(p. 132)  
qj ZERO SET MEMORY  
(p. 89, 124)  
Current folder  
FRAME REC indicator  
wa Audio mode  
(p. 74)  
(p. 219)  
INTERVAL TAPE indicator  
1)  
Data file name *  
(p. 164, 168)  
(p. 73)  
INTERVAL MEM STILL indicator  
Time (p. 36)  
Auto date  
(p. 154)  
(p. 221)  
qk END SEARCH (p. 43, 49)  
ws Warning (p. 233)  
DATE SEARCH  
wd Camera recording lamp (p. 30)  
(p. 90)  
This indicator appears in the viewfinder.  
PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN  
wf Built-in light (p. 79)  
(p. 92)  
2)  
Video flash mode *  
ql NIGHTSHOT (p. 39)  
(p. 211)  
SUPER NIGHTSHOT  
(p. 39)  
2)  
Flash *  
COLOR SLOW SHUTTER  
(p. 40)  
1)  
* This indicator appears when MEMORY MIX works.  
2)  
* This indicator appears when you use the video flash light (optional).  
266  
In d e x  
A, B  
I, J, K, L  
i.LINK ...................................... 244  
i.LINK cable ..... 96, 121, 139, 153,  
184, 208, 245  
R
AC Adaptor .............................. 19  
Adjusting viewfinder lens ...... 35  
AFM HiFi Sound .................... 238  
AUDIO MIX ........................... 214  
AUDIO MODE ....................... 219  
AUTO SHTR ........................... 211  
A/ V connecting cable  
........... 51, 94, 119, 138, 152, 208  
BACK LIGHT ........................... 38  
BATTERY INFO ....................... 20  
Battery pack .............................. 18  
BEEP ........................................ 222  
BOUNCE ................................... 61  
Built-in light ............................. 79  
Recording folder .................... 162  
Recording time ......................... 22  
Recording/ Playback system  
............................................... 237  
Rec Review ............................... 43  
Remaining battery time  
indicator ........................... 36, 48  
Remaining tape indicator ....... 36  
Remote Commander ............. 264  
Remote sensor ........................ 257  
RESET ...................................... 230  
ID-1 system ............................... 60  
ID-2 system ............................... 60  
Image protection .................... 176  
Image quality mode .............. 128  
Image size ............................... 130  
Index screen ............................ 165  
“InfoLITHIUM” battery ....... 242  
Infrared rays emitter  
......................... 39, 102, 109, 257  
Insert editing .......................... 123  
Interval recording .................... 72  
Interval Photo recording  
S
Self-diagnosis display ........... 232  
Self-timer recording  
............................................... 154  
JPEG ......................................... 126  
LANC jack .............................. 261  
LUMINANCE KEY ................. 65  
C, D  
........................... 41, 55, 135, 149  
Shoulder strap ........................ 256  
Signal convert function ......... 208  
Skip scan ................................... 49  
SLIDE SHOW ......................... 174  
SLOW SHUTTER ..................... 65  
STEADYSHOT ....................... 213  
Stereo tape .............................. 238  
STILL ......................................... 65  
STRIPE....................................... 61  
Sub sound ....................... 214, 238  
SUPER NIGHTSHOT .............. 39  
S VIDEO jack  
Camera chroma key .............. 140  
Charging battery ...................... 19  
Charging built-in rechargeable  
battery .................................. 249  
Cleaning cassette indicator  
............................................... 248  
Clock set .................................... 26  
Color Slow Shutter .................. 40  
Data code .................................. 47  
Date search ............................... 90  
DEMO ...................................... 221  
DIGITAL EFFECT ............. 65, 85  
Digital8 system ...................... 237  
Digital program editing  
M, N  
Main sound ..................... 214, 238  
Manual focus ............................ 71  
Memory chroma key ............. 140  
Memory luminance key ........ 140  
MEMORY MIX ....................... 140  
Memory overlap .................... 140  
Memory PB ZOOM ............... 172  
Memory photo recording ..... 132  
“Memory Stick” ............. 126, 240  
“Memory Stick” recording  
capacity ................................ 131  
Menu settings ......................... 210  
Mirror mode ............................. 35  
Moisture condensation ......... 247  
Monaural............. 52, 95, 120, 152  
MONOTONE ........................... 61  
M.FADER .................................. 61  
MPEG ...................................... 126  
MPEG movie recording ........ 146  
New folder .............................. 160  
NIGHTSHOT ........................... 39  
NTSC system .......................... 246  
........... 51, 94, 119, 138, 152, 208  
....................................... 106, 156  
DISPLAY ................................... 47  
DNR ......................................... 214  
DOT ........................................... 61  
Dual sound track tape ........... 238  
T, U, V  
Tape counter ............................. 36  
Tape PB ZOOM ........................ 87  
Tape photo recording .............. 56  
TBC .......................................... 214  
Time code .................................. 37  
Title ...................................... 75, 77  
TRAIL ........................................ 65  
Transition .................................. 31  
TV color systems .................... 246  
USB jack .......................... 183, 185  
USB Streaming ....................... 197  
E
Easy Dubbing ........................... 98  
EDITSEARCH .......................... 43  
END SEARCH .................... 43, 49  
Exif ........................................... 126  
Exposure ................................... 70  
F, G, H  
W, X, Y, Z  
O, P, Q  
FADER ...................................... 61  
Fade in/ out ............................... 61  
FLASH MOTION ..................... 65  
FOCUS....................................... 71  
Format ..................................... 218  
Frame recording ....................... 74  
Full charge ................................ 20  
Grip strap ................................ 261  
Heads ....................................... 248  
HiFi SOUND .......................... 214  
Hi8/ standard 8 mm system  
Warning indicators ................ 233  
Warning message .................. 236  
Wide-angle ............................... 34  
Wide mode ............................... 58  
WIPE .......................................... 61  
WORLD TIME ........................ 222  
Write-protect tab .............. 29, 240  
Zero set memory ..................... 89  
Zoom ......................................... 34  
OLD MOVIE ............................. 65  
Operation indicators ............. 265  
ORC ......................................... 219  
OVERLAP ................................. 61  
PB folder ................................. 169  
Photo scan ................................. 93  
Photo search ............................. 92  
PICTURE EFFECT ............. 64, 83  
Picture search ........................... 49  
Playback pause ......................... 49  
Playing time .............................. 23  
Print mark ............................... 180  
PROGRAM AE ........................ 68  
............................................... 237  
267  
Printed on 100% recycled paper using  
VOC (Volatile Organic Compound)-free  
vegetable oil based ink.  
Printed in Japan  

Yorkville Sound Car Amplifier NX720S User Manual
Westcott 1862 User Manual
Tekkeon DVP5960 User Manual
Specialized AFR S90 User Manual
SoundMax SM CDM1041 User Manual
Sony TCM 333 User Manual
Sony DVW 709WS User Manual
Sony Camera Accessories CA 570P User Manual
Sharp Business Wallet Calculator EL480SRB User Manual
Samsung Car Satellite TV System 8000 User Manual